WO2013069796A1 - Electronic device, information system and server - Google Patents

Electronic device, information system and server Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2013069796A1
WO2013069796A1 PCT/JP2012/079222 JP2012079222W WO2013069796A1 WO 2013069796 A1 WO2013069796 A1 WO 2013069796A1 JP 2012079222 W JP2012079222 W JP 2012079222W WO 2013069796 A1 WO2013069796 A1 WO 2013069796A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
display
unit
amount
image
electronic device
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2012/079222
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
井上 英也
Original Assignee
株式会社ニコン
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 株式会社ニコン filed Critical 株式会社ニコン
Priority to JP2013543060A priority Critical patent/JP6146307B2/en
Publication of WO2013069796A1 publication Critical patent/WO2013069796A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09GARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G5/00Control arrangements or circuits for visual indicators common to cathode-ray tube indicators and other visual indicators
    • G09G5/14Display of multiple viewports
    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09GARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G5/00Control arrangements or circuits for visual indicators common to cathode-ray tube indicators and other visual indicators
    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09GARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G2340/00Aspects of display data processing
    • G09G2340/04Changes in size, position or resolution of an image
    • G09G2340/0492Change of orientation of the displayed image, e.g. upside-down, mirrored
    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09GARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G2340/00Aspects of display data processing
    • G09G2340/14Solving problems related to the presentation of information to be displayed
    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09GARRANGEMENTS OR CIRCUITS FOR CONTROL OF INDICATING DEVICES USING STATIC MEANS TO PRESENT VARIABLE INFORMATION
    • G09G2354/00Aspects of interface with display user

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to an electronic device, an information system, and a server.
  • This application claims priority based on Japanese Patent Application No. 2011-246571 filed on November 10, 2011, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
  • the screen may be switched to an unintended screen display type for the operation of the mobile terminal by the user.
  • the screen display type unintended by the user occurs, the user needs to perform a new operation on the mobile terminal in order to switch to the intended screen display type. Unintentional switching of the screen display type has been a factor that reduces user convenience.
  • An electronic device includes a display unit that displays a display image based on display data, an imaging unit that can image a subject on the front side of the display unit, and a characteristic portion of the subject that images the front side And a display control unit that controls a display format of the display image based on a temporal change amount of the display image.
  • An information system is an information system including an electronic device and a server, and the electronic device includes a display unit that displays a display image based on display data, and a front side of the display unit.
  • An imaging unit capable of imaging the subject, and a communication unit that transmits a captured image by the imaging unit to the server and receives display control information for controlling a display format of the display image from the server.
  • a communication unit that receives the captured image from the electronic device and transmits the display control information to the electronic device, and a temporal change amount of a feature portion of a subject included in the captured image received from the electronic device.
  • a display control information generation unit that generates the display control information to be transmitted to the electronic device.
  • a server communicates with an electronic device including a display unit that displays a display image based on display data, an imaging unit that can capture a subject in front of the display unit, and a communication unit.
  • a communication unit that receives the captured image from the electronic device and transmits the display control information to the electronic device; and a temporal feature of a subject portion included in the captured image received from the electronic device.
  • a display control information generation unit configured to generate the display control information to be transmitted to the electronic device based on a change amount.
  • FIG. 1A and 1B are schematic external views of an electronic apparatus 3 (eg, a portable terminal) according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • 1A shows the front surface (front surface, front surface of the main body) of the electronic device 3
  • FIG. 1B shows the rear surface (back surface, rear surface of the main body) of the electronic device 3.
  • the electronic device 3 includes a touch screen (display unit) 44, a cursor pad 48, a front camera (lens, imaging unit) 62, a speaker 82, a microphone 84, and a determination / home button 92 on the front surface of the housing.
  • the electronic device 3 includes a back camera (lens, imaging unit) 64 on the rear surface of the housing.
  • the electronic device 3 has a power button 90 on the upper part of the casing (upper part of the main body).
  • the electronic device 3 includes a motion sensor 50 (for example, a triaxial acceleration sensor or a triaxial angular velocity sensor), a GPS 52, an azimuth meter 54, and an elevation angle sensor 56, as indicated by a broken line.
  • Touch screen 44 displays a display image based on the display data.
  • the display data is, for example, image data or text data.
  • Display images are images (for example, images such as photographs and illustrations), text (for example, characters and symbols), and the like.
  • the touch screen 44 displays a cursor indicating a position designated by the user.
  • the touch screen 44 includes a touch sensor and detects a touch position by the user.
  • the display format (screen display type) of the display image displayed on the touch screen 44 is controlled by the display control unit 100 (described later) (details are described later).
  • the cursor pad 48 accepts a cursor movement operation displayed on the touch screen 44. That is, the cursor displayed on the touch screen 44 moves according to the movement of the user's finger on the cursor pad 48.
  • the front camera 62 images a subject on the front side (front side of the casing, touch screen 44 side) according to control of a camera unit 60 (described later).
  • the back camera 64 images a subject on the rear side (the rear side of the housing, the opposite side or the opposite side of the touch screen 44) according to control of a camera unit 60 (described later).
  • the front camera 62 (or the front camera 62 and the camera unit 60) is also referred to as a first imaging unit
  • the back camera 64 (or the back camera 64 and the camera unit 60) is also referred to as a second imaging unit.
  • the front camera 62 and the back camera 64 may be an infrared camera or a camera with illumination so that the subject can be imaged in an environment where the subject is imaged in a dark place.
  • the speaker 82 outputs sound (including voice) according to control of the audio unit 80 (described later).
  • the microphone 84 supplies the collected sound data to the audio unit 80 (described later).
  • the power button 90 is a button for turning on power to a casing (a casing body, a body, main body (a body, a main body)).
  • the decision / home button 92 is a button for instructing various decisions or displaying a home screen (initial display screen).
  • the motion sensor 50 includes an acceleration sensor and / or an angular velocity sensor to detect movement of the casing (eg, inclination of the casing), and detects acceleration or / and angular velocity applied to the casing.
  • the GPS 52 measures (positions) the position of the housing.
  • the azimuth meter 54 is, for example, a geomagnetic sensor, and detects an azimuth (that is, a direction in which the housing faces).
  • the elevation sensor 56 detects the elevation angle of the casing (for example, the angle between the incident direction of light and the ground surface, or the viewing angle from the horizontal) in order to detect the movement of the casing.
  • FIG. 2 is an example of a block diagram of the electronic device 3.
  • the electronic device 3 includes a processor 10, an interface unit 20, a storage unit 30, an input / output unit 40, a camera unit 60, a communication unit 70, and An audio unit 80 is provided.
  • the processor 10 controls the entire electronic device 3.
  • the processor 10 includes the display control unit 100, and the temporal change amount (transition amount) of the feature portion of the subject imaged on the front side (that is, the feature portion on the captured image captured by the first imaging unit).
  • the display format of the display image is controlled on the basis of (a transition amount, a transition degree), the change rate (a change rate, a transition ⁇ rate), and the amount of change of the characteristic portion in one period). Details of the display control unit 100 will be described later.
  • the interface unit 20 supplies information (for example, control information and output information) from the processor 10 to each unit. Further, the interface unit 20 supplies information (for example, stored information and input information) from each unit to the processor 10.
  • information for example, control information and output information
  • the storage unit 30 stores various information.
  • the storage unit 30 stores a program processed in the processor 10 and various setting information.
  • the storage unit 30 stores display data to be displayed on the touch screen 44.
  • the input / output unit 40 includes a touch screen controller 42, a cursor pad controller 46, and the like.
  • the touch screen controller 42 controls display on the touch screen 44 based on control information output from the processor 10 (display control unit 100).
  • the cursor pad controller 46 supplies the movement operation of the cursor received via the cursor pad 48 to the processor 10.
  • the camera unit 60 controls the front camera 62 and the back camera 64 to image the subject.
  • the camera unit 60 supplies the captured image to the processor 10. Note that the camera unit 60 may image the subject in accordance with the control of the processor 10.
  • the communication unit 70 communicates with the outside (for example, other electronic devices, servers, storages) under the control of the processor 10.
  • the audio unit 80 controls the speaker 82 and the microphone 84 according to the control of the processor 10.
  • FIG. 3 is an example of a block diagram in the display control unit 100.
  • FIG. 4 is an example of switching control by a display format switching function.
  • FIG. 5 shows a state where the electronic device 3 is used.
  • FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the feature portion of the subject and the amount of change in the subject feature portion.
  • the display control unit 100 includes a setting recognition unit 110, an inclination amount determination unit 120, a feature region extraction unit 130, a change amount calculation unit 140, a switching determination unit 150, a switching restriction unit (hold unit) 160, A switching processing unit 180 and a setting unit 190 are provided.
  • the setting unit 190 sets various information. For example, ON (valid) / OFF (invalid) of the display image display format switching function is set.
  • the setting unit 190 also sets on / off of a hold function (hold means) that is one of the display image display format control functions.
  • the on / off of the hold function is referred to when the display image display format switching function is on. In other words, the hold function is a subfunction of the display image display format switching function.
  • the setting content by the setting unit 190 is stored in the storage unit 30.
  • the setting unit 190 sets the display format switching function on / off and the hold function on / off automatically or according to a user instruction according to the environment.
  • the setting unit 190 turns on the hold function when, for example, an application that displays a display image in a switchable display format is executed and the power saving mode is not set.
  • an application that displays a display image in a switchable display format is an application that displays a display image whose display format is switched as shown below (see FIG. 4).
  • FIG. 5 (a) the user rotates the casing, and the touch screen 44 changes from a vertically oriented state (described later) to a horizontally oriented state (described later).
  • 4A and 4B show switching control for rotating the display image according to the change in the orientation of the touch screen 44.
  • FIG. For example, FIGS.
  • 4A and 4B show an example of switching control in which the display format of the display image is switched from a portrait image (described later) to a landscape image (described later), or from a landscape image to a portrait image.
  • 4C and 4D show switching control for reducing the display image according to the change in the orientation of the touch screen 44, that is, the display format of the display image is from a vertically long image to a horizontally long image, or from a horizontally long image.
  • An example of switching control that does not switch to a portrait image is shown.
  • FIG. 4A The figure on the left side of the arrow in FIG. 4A is an image (hereinafter referred to as a vertically long image) in which the top and bottom direction is the longitudinal direction on the touch screen 44 in a state where the vertical direction is the longitudinal direction (hereinafter referred to as a vertically oriented state).
  • display image HG 1 is represents a state that is displayed.
  • the display image HG 1 includes text T 1 and a photograph P 1 .
  • Photos P 1 is a portrait.
  • the right side of the arrow in FIG. 4A is a display on the touch screen 44 in which the horizontal direction is the longitudinal direction (hereinafter referred to as landscape orientation), which is an image in which the horizontal direction is the longitudinal direction (hereinafter landscape orientation).
  • the image HG 1 ′ is displayed.
  • the display image HG 1 ′ includes text T 1 ′ and a photograph P 1 .
  • Photos P 1 is a portrait.
  • the display format of the display image is In accordance with the change in orientation, the display image HG 1 that is a portrait image is switched to the display image HG 1 ′ that is a landscape image.
  • the display format of the display image is changed vertically state from landscape state (left direction arrow)
  • the display format of the display image is changed vertically state from landscape state (left direction arrow)
  • the display image HG 1 ' is oblong image
  • the display image HG 1 is a vertically long image And switch.
  • the photo P 1 on the display image HG 1 ′ has the same display size and display direction as the photo P 1 on the display image HG 1 .
  • 'Text T 1 of the' on display image HG 1 is to match the a landscape display image HG 1 ', is obtained by rearranging the text T 1 of the on the display image HG 1.
  • FIG. 4B The left side of FIG arrow in FIG. 4 (b), the touch screen 44 of the horizontally oriented state, the display image HG 2 is a horizontally long image, and represents a state that is displayed.
  • Display image HG 2 is, and a text T 2 and the photograph P 2.
  • Photos P 2 is a landscape.
  • the diagram on the right side of the arrow in FIG. 4B shows that the display image HG 2 ′, which is a portrait image, is displayed on the touch screen 44 in the portrait and landscape orientation.
  • the display image HG 2 ′ includes text T 2 ′ and a photograph P 2 .
  • Photos P 2 is a landscape.
  • the display format of the display image is that of the touch screen 44.
  • the display image HG 2 that is a horizontally long image is switched to the display image HG 2 ′ that is a vertically long image.
  • the touch screen 44 is changed from the vertical state to the horizontal state (left direction arrow)
  • the display format of the display image the display image HG 2 'is a portrait image
  • the display image HG 2 is a horizontally long image And switch.
  • photographs P 2 on the display image HG 2 ' are identical in photograph P 2 and the display size and the display direction of the display image HG 2.
  • 'Text T 2 of the' on display image HG 2 is obtained by rearranging the text T 2 of the on the display image HG 2.
  • FIG. 4C The left side of FIG arrow in FIG. 4 (c), similar to the left side of FIG arrow in FIG. 4 (a), the display image HG 1, represents a state that is displayed.
  • the diagram on the right side of the arrow in FIG. 4C shows a state in which the display image HG 1 ′′, which is a portrait image, is displayed on the touch screen 44 in the landscape orientation.
  • the display image HG 1 ′′ includes text T 1 ′′ and a photograph P 1 ′′.
  • the photograph P 1 ′′ is vertically long.
  • the display format of the display image is according circumferential direction of the length change of the (shortened), switched from the display image HG 1 is a vertically long image, and to reduced portrait image at a display image HG 1 ''.
  • the touch screen 44 changes from the horizontal state to the vertical state (left arrow)
  • the display format of the display image is reduced in accordance with the change in the vertical direction of the touch screen 44 (which becomes longer).
  • the display image HG 1 ′′ which is a vertically long image is switched to the display image HG 1 which is a vertically long image of the original size.
  • the photo P 1 ′′ on the display image HG 1 ′′ is obtained by reducing the photo P 1 on the display image HG 1 so as to match the reduced display image HG 1 ′′.
  • FIG. 4D The left side of FIG arrow in FIG. 4 (d), similarly to the left side of FIG arrow in FIG. 4 (b), the display image HG 2, represents a state that is displayed.
  • the diagram on the right side of the arrow in FIG. 4D shows a state in which the display image HG 2 ′′, which is a landscape image, is displayed on the touch screen 44 in the portrait orientation.
  • the display image HG 2 ′′ includes text T 2 ′′ and a photograph P 2 ′′.
  • the photograph P 2 ′′ is horizontally long.
  • the display format of the display image is that of the touch screen 44.
  • the display image HG 2 that is a horizontally long image is switched to the display image HG 2 ′′ that is a reduced horizontally long image.
  • the touch screen 44 changes from the vertical orientation to the horizontal orientation (right arrow)
  • the display format of the display image is reduced in accordance with the change in the horizontal length of the touch screen 44 (which becomes longer).
  • the display image HG 2 ′′ which is a horizontally long image is switched to the display image HG 2 which is a horizontally long image of the original size.
  • the photograph P 2 ′′ on the display image HG 2 ′′ is obtained by reducing the photograph P 2 on the display image HG 2 so as to match the reduced display image HG 2 ′′.
  • the setting recognizing unit 110 acquires setting information stored in the storage unit 30 (display image display format switching function on / off information, hold function on / off information). For example, the setting recognition unit 110 acquires the setting information stored in the storage unit 30 in response to a request from the inclination amount determination unit 120 and outputs (responds) the setting information to the inclination amount determination unit 120.
  • the tilt amount determination unit 120 acquires a detection value from the motion sensor 50 (elevation angle sensor 56), and calculates the tilt amount of the housing. Note that the tilt amount determination unit 120 may calculate the tilt amount of the housing when the display format switching function is set to ON.
  • the inclination amount determination unit 120 that calculates the inclination amount of the housing determines whether the calculated inclination amount is equal to or larger than a predetermined amount, that is, whether the housing is inclined more than the predetermined amount.
  • the predetermined amount is, for example, 45 degrees or 60 degrees.
  • the predetermined amount can be, for example, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, or 90 degrees.
  • the tilt amount determination unit 120 does nothing when the display format switching function is set to OFF. In other words, the tilt amount determination unit 120 does not switch the display format when the display format switching function is set to OFF, so even if the tilt amount of the housing has already been calculated. ,do nothing.
  • the tilt amount determination unit 120 determines that the casing is not tilted by a predetermined amount or more, the display format switching is not performed, and thus the display format switching function is set to ON. But do nothing.
  • the hold function of this embodiment is set to OFF.
  • a notification (information) indicating that the hold function is set to OFF is output to the switching determination unit 150 together with the tilt amount of the housing and the tilt direction of the housing.
  • the inclination amount determination unit 120 is set to ON when the hold function of the present embodiment is set to ON.
  • the tilt amount of the casing and the tilt direction of the casing are output to the feature region extraction unit 130.
  • the feature region extraction unit 130 acquires a captured image captured by the front camera 62 from the camera unit 60.
  • the feature region extraction unit 130 acquires captured images before and after the tilt of the casing from the camera unit 60 when the tilt amount of the casing and the tilt direction of the casing are acquired from the tilt amount determination unit 120. That is, the feature region extraction unit 130, when the display format switching function and the hold function are set to ON, and when it is determined that the casing is tilted by a predetermined amount or more, the captured images before and after the tilt of the casing Is acquired from the camera unit 60.
  • the captured images before and after the tilt are a captured image before tilting the casing (a captured image immediately before starting the tilting operation or a captured image immediately after starting the tilting operation), and a captured image after tilting the casing ( (Taken image immediately after the tilting operation is completed).
  • the feature region extraction unit 130 acquires the tilt amount of the casing and the tilt direction of the casing from the tilt amount determination unit 120. It is an image before (past) before the time. Therefore, in the method of requesting the camera unit 60 to capture the image when the amount of inclination of the housing is acquired from the amount of inclination determination unit 120, the feature region extraction unit 130 acquires a captured image before the inclination of the housing. Is difficult. Therefore, for example, the feature region extraction unit 130 acquires a captured image before the casing is tilted by the following method.
  • the camera unit 60 when the display unit switching function and the hold function are set to ON, the camera unit 60 always captures an image and temporarily stores it for a predetermined time (predetermined time). It is a method to keep.
  • the camera unit 60 captures an image from the time when the housing starts to tilt by the notification from the motion sensor 50 (elevation angle sensor 56) (when the motion of the housing is detected), and is constant. This is a method of temporarily storing time (predetermined time).
  • the feature region extraction unit 130 temporarily receives the tilt amount of the casing and the tilt direction of the casing from the tilt amount determination unit 120.
  • the pre-tilt captured image can be acquired from the images stored in the.
  • the feature region extraction unit 130 before and after the tilt of the casing is acquired from the camera unit 60, the feature region extraction unit 130 before and after the tilt of the casing, respectively.
  • the characteristic part of the subject is extracted from the captured image.
  • the assumed subject is a user (self) who holds the electronic device 3 and is looking at the touch screen 44.
  • the characteristic portion is, for example, a part of the user's face (for example, eyes, ears) or a face outline.
  • the captured image before tilting the housing is the captured image SG illustrated in FIG. 6A and the captured image after tilting the housing is the captured image SG ′ illustrated in FIG.
  • 130 extracts straight lines L 1 and L 1 ′ that pass through both eyes of the user from the captured image SG and the captured image SG ′ as characteristic portions of the subject.
  • the feature region extraction unit 130 instead of the straight lines L 1 and L 1 ′ passing through both eyes of the user, as shown in FIG. 6C, straight lines L 2 and L 2 ′ passing through both ears of the user. May be extracted as a characteristic part of the subject.
  • the feature region extraction unit 130 as shown in FIG. 6 (d), the straight line L 3 (or straight line L 4 ), straight line L passing through the center of the rectangle adjacent to the contour of the user's face. 3 ′ (or straight line L 4 ′) may be extracted as a characteristic portion of the subject.
  • the feature region extraction unit 130 can extract the feature portion of the subject from the respective captured images before and after the tilt of the casing, the tilt amount of the casing acquired from the tilt amount determination unit 120 and the tilt of the casing Along with the direction, information indicating the characteristic part of the subject extracted from the respective captured images before and after the tilt is output to the change amount calculation unit 140.
  • the feature region extraction unit 130 uses the slope of the straight line L 1 as information indicating the subject feature portion. And the slope value of the straight line L 1 ′ are output to the variation calculation unit 140.
  • the feature region extraction unit 130 acquires from the tilt amount determination unit 120 when the feature portion of the subject cannot be extracted from at least one of the captured image before tilting the housing and the captured image after tilting the housing.
  • a notification (information) indicating that the feature portion could not be extracted is output to the switching determination unit 150 together with the amount of inclination of the casing and the inclination direction of the casing.
  • each of the cases before and after the inclination of the housing is determined. It is highly probable that a facial part or contour of the user can be extracted from the captured image.
  • the change amount calculation unit 140 is a subject extracted from the amount of inclination of the housing, the direction of inclination of the housing, and each captured image (the captured image before the housing is tilted and the captured image after the housing is tilted).
  • the temporal change amount of the feature portion is calculated.
  • the change amount calculator 140 calculates the angle theta 2 (see FIG.
  • the angle ⁇ 3 is calculated as the temporal change amount of the feature portion.
  • the angles ⁇ 1 , ⁇ 2 , and ⁇ 3 described above are also the amount of rotation of the characteristic portion of the subject before and after the inclination of the housing.
  • the change amount calculation unit 140 when acquiring the position of the straight line L 1 (coordinates) in the captured image shown in FIG.
  • a temporal characteristic parts It calculates a movement amount of the position of the straight line L 1 in the captured image as the variation amount. For example, when the change amount calculation unit 140 acquires the value of the slope of the straight line L 1 ′ with respect to the gravitational direction of the casing detected by the motion sensor 50 as information indicating the characteristic part of the subject, the time of the characteristic part is obtained. The inclination (angle) of the straight line L 1 ′ with respect to the direction of gravity is calculated as a general change amount.
  • the change amount calculation unit 140 that calculates the temporal change amount of the feature portion of the subject includes the amount of inclination of the casing acquired from the feature region extraction unit 130 and the inclination direction of the casing, and the temporal change amount of the feature portion of the subject.
  • the change amount is output to the switching determination unit 150.
  • the switching determination unit 150 determines whether it is necessary to switch the display format of the display image.
  • the switching determination unit 150 obtains a notification (information) from the inclination amount determination unit 120 that the amount of inclination of the housing, the inclination direction of the housing, and the hold function of the present embodiment are set to off, It is determined that the display format needs to be switched. In other words, when it is determined that the housing is inclined by a predetermined amount or more and the hold function of the present embodiment is set to OFF, the switching determination unit 150 needs to switch the display format. Is determined.
  • the switching determination unit 150 also displays the display format even when the amount of tilt of the housing, the tilt direction of the housing, and a notification (information) that the feature portion could not be extracted from the feature region extraction unit 130. It is determined that switching is required. That is, when it is determined that the casing is tilted by a predetermined amount or more and the hold function is set to ON, at least the captured image before tilting the casing and the captured image after tilting the casing are at least When the feature portion of the subject is not extracted from one side (in other words, when the temporal change amount of the feature portion of the subject cannot be calculated), the switching determination unit 150 needs to switch the display format. It is determined that
  • the switching determination portion 150 determines whether or not it is necessary to switch the display format of the display image.
  • the switching determination unit 150 determines that the display format needs to be switched when the temporal change amount of the feature portion of the subject is equal to or greater than a first threshold, and the temporal change amount of the feature portion of the subject. Is less than the first threshold value, it is determined that it is not necessary to switch the display format of the display image. That is, when it is determined that the housing is tilted by a predetermined amount or more and the hold function is set to ON, the temporal change amount of the feature portion of the subject is equal to or greater than the first threshold value The switching determination unit 150 determines that the display format needs to be switched (in other words, the hold processing by the hold function is unnecessary), and the temporal change amount of the feature portion of the subject is less than the first threshold value.
  • the switching determination unit 150 determines that switching of the display format of the display image is unnecessary (in other words, hold processing by the hold function is necessary).
  • the display format of the display image can be controlled based on the result of detecting the change / transition of the relative posture between the subject (such as the user's face) and the housing (main body). When the change / transition of the relative posture is relatively large, the display format is switched. When the change / transition of the relative posture is relatively small, the display format is not switched.
  • the first threshold value to be compared with the temporal change amount of the characteristic part of the subject is that when the user tilts the casing by rotating the casing, the user moves along with the tilt of the casing. It is a value for determining whether or not its own face (for example, a straight line connecting both eyes) is intentionally inclined.
  • An example in which the user's face is intentionally inclined with the inclination of the housing is, for example, a case as shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 5A is an example in which the user does not intentionally tilt his / her face along with the tilt of the casing when the user tilts only the casing by 90 degrees.
  • the amount of change in the characteristic part of the subject is 90 degrees.
  • FIG. 5A the amount of change in the characteristic part of the subject is 90 degrees.
  • the amount of change in the characteristic portion of the subject is approximately 0 degrees.
  • the first threshold value may be an angle of about several degrees to about 45 degrees.
  • the first threshold can be 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, or 45 degrees.
  • the first threshold is set to 30 degrees, when the user tilts the casing 90 degrees clockwise and the face is tilted 60 degrees or more clockwise, the amount of change is less than the first threshold. Therefore, hold processing by the hold function works.
  • the switching determination unit 150 When it is determined that the display format needs to be switched, the switching determination unit 150 outputs the tilt amount of the housing and the tilt direction of the housing to the switching processing unit 180. On the other hand, when the switching determination unit 150 determines that switching of the display format is unnecessary, the switching determination unit 150 outputs a notification (information) to the effect that the display format is maintained to the switching restriction unit 160.
  • the switching restriction unit 160 When the switching restriction unit 160 obtains a notification to maintain the display format from the switching determination unit 150, the switching limitation unit 160 controls the display format of the display image so as not to be switched according to the tilt amount of the housing and the tilt direction of the housing. To do. For example, the switching restriction unit 160 outputs nothing (or a notification (information) to the effect that the display format is maintained) to the switching processing unit 180.
  • the switching processing unit 180 acquires the tilt amount of the casing and the tilt direction of the casing from the switching determination unit 150, the display processing of the display image is performed according to the tilt amount of the casing and the tilt direction of the casing. Control to switch. For example, the switching processing unit 180 determines a display format (display format after switching) based on the tilt amount of the housing and the tilt direction of the housing, and outputs the determined display format to the touch screen controller 42. . As a result, the display image displayed on the touch screen 44 is switched as shown in FIG. On the other hand, the switching processing unit 180 does nothing when the notification (information) to maintain the display format is acquired from the switching restriction unit 160.
  • the display control unit 100 determines that the case is tilted by a predetermined amount or more, and if the display format switching function and the hold function are set to ON, The display format of the display image on the touch screen 44 is selectively switched in accordance with the temporal change amount of the feature portion.
  • the switching determination unit 150 may output a notification (information) indicating that the display format is maintained to the switching processing unit 180.
  • the switching determination unit 150 may have the function of the switching restriction unit 160 (the switching restriction unit 160 may be absorbed by the switching determination unit 150).
  • FIG. 7 is an example of a flowchart showing a flow of processing (setting processing) related to setting of display format switching.
  • the flowchart of FIG. 7 is an example of the flow of automatic setting processing.
  • the flowchart in FIG. 7 starts at any time (for example, periodically) when the electronic apparatus 3 is powered on. At the time of shipment, it is assumed that the storage unit 30 is set (stored) with ON / OFF of the switching control and ON / OFF of the hold function.
  • the processor 10 (setting recognition unit 110) refers to the storage unit 30 and determines whether or not the switching function is on (step S10).
  • step S10 When the switching function is on (step S10: Yes), the processor 10 (an application execution unit (not shown)) determines whether an application that displays a display image in a switchable display format is being executed ( Step S20).
  • step S20 when an application that displays a display image in a switchable display format is being executed (step S20: Yes), whether or not the processor 10 (power saving mode control unit (not shown)) is in the power saving mode is determined. Is determined (step S40).
  • step S40 when not in the power saving mode (energy saving mode) (step S40: No), the processor 10 (setting recognition unit 110) refers to the storage unit 30 and determines whether or not the hold function is off (step). S50). When the hold function is off (step S50: Yes), the processor 10 (setting unit 190) sets the hold function on (step S60). On the other hand, if the hold function is not off (step S50: No), that is, if the hold function is already on, step S60 is skipped, and this flowchart ends.
  • step S40 when in the power saving mode (step S40: Yes), the processor 10 (setting recognition unit 110) refers to the storage unit 30 and determines whether or not the hold function is on (step S52). .
  • step S52: Yes the processor 10 (setting unit 190) sets the hold function to off (step S62).
  • step S62 the hold function is not on (step S52: No)
  • step S62 is skipped, and this flowchart ends.
  • step S20 when an application for displaying a display image in a switchable display format is not being executed (step S20: No), the processor 10 (setting unit 190) sets the switching function to off (step S30), and step Proceed to S62.
  • step S10 when the switching function is off (step S10: No), the processor 10 (an application execution unit (not shown)) is executing an application that displays a display image in a switchable display format. Is determined (step S22).
  • step S22 when the application which displays the display image of the switchable display format is being executed (step S22: Yes), the processor 10 (setting unit 190) sets the switching function to on (step S32), Proceed to step S40.
  • step S22 when an application for displaying a display image in a switchable display format is not being executed (step S22: No), this flowchart ends. The same applies to the setting processing (setting of the switching function, setting of the hold function, setting of the follow function (described later)) in the electronic device 4 according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 8 is an example of a flowchart showing the flow of display format control processing in the electronic device 3.
  • the flowchart in FIG. 8 starts when the housing is tilted by a predetermined amount or more when the display format switching function is set to ON. Whether or not the casing is tilted by a predetermined amount or more is determined by the tilt amount determination unit 120 as described above.
  • the setting recognition unit 110 (or the inclination amount determination unit 120) refers to the storage unit 30 and determines whether or not the hold function is on (step S110).
  • step S110 If the hold function is on in step S110 (step S110: Yes), the tilt amount determination unit 120 outputs the tilt amount of the housing and the tilt direction of the housing to the feature region extraction unit 130.
  • the feature region extraction unit 130 tries to extract the feature portion of the subject from each of the captured images before and after the inclination of the housing (step S120), and determines whether the feature portion of the subject has been extracted from each of them (step S120). Step S130).
  • the feature region extraction unit 130 may selectively extract the feature portion of the subject in the captured image at every predetermined time before the casing is tilted.
  • step S130 when the feature portion of the subject can be extracted from each (step S130: Yes), the feature region extraction unit 130 determines the feature portion of the subject along with the amount of inclination of the housing and the direction of inclination of the housing. Is output to the change amount calculation unit 140.
  • the change amount calculation unit 140 calculates the temporal change amount of the feature portion of the subject based on the captured image (reference image) before the casing is tilted and the captured image (transition image) after the casing is tilted.
  • step S140 the calculated change amount is output to the switching determination unit 150 together with the inclination amount of the housing and the inclination direction of the housing.
  • the switching determination unit 150 determines whether or not the temporal change amount of the feature portion of the subject is equal to or greater than the first threshold (step S150).
  • step S150 If it is determined in step S150 that the temporal change amount of the characteristic portion of the subject is less than the first threshold (step S150: No), the switching determination unit 150 does not need to switch the display format of the display image. And a notification (information) to maintain the display format is output to the switching restriction unit 160.
  • the switching restriction unit 160 that has acquired the notification (information) that the display format is maintained controls to not switch the display format of the display image, that is, to hold the switching of the display format (step S170).
  • the switching restriction unit 160 outputs a notification (information) to maintain the display format to the switching processing unit 180.
  • the switching processing unit 180 that has acquired the notification (information) to maintain the display format from the switching restriction unit 160 does nothing. Then, this flowchart ends. Note that the rectangle in step S170 is a broken line indicates that the switching processing unit 180 does nothing.
  • step S110 When the hold function is not on in step S110 (step S110: No), the tilt amount determination unit 120 notifies that the hold function is set to be off together with the tilt amount of the housing and the tilt direction of the housing. (Information) is output to the switching determination unit 150.
  • the switch determination unit 150 that has acquired the notification (information) that the hold function is set to OFF together with the tilt amount of the casing and the tilt direction of the casing determines that the display format needs to be switched.
  • the tilt amount of the casing and the tilt direction of the casing are output to the switching processing unit 180.
  • the switching processing unit 180 that acquires the tilt amount of the housing and the tilt direction of the housing controls the display image display format to be switched according to the tilt amount of the housing and the tilt direction of the housing ( Step S160). For example, the switching processing unit 180 determines a display format (display format after switching) based on the tilt amount of the housing and the tilt direction of the housing, and outputs the determined display format to the touch screen controller 42. . Then,
  • step S130 when the feature portion of the subject cannot be extracted from at least one of the captured images before and after the inclination of the casing (step S130: No), the feature region extraction unit 130 determines the amount of inclination of the casing, and A notification that the feature portion could not be extracted is output to the switching determination unit 150 along with the inclination direction of the housing.
  • the switch determination unit 150 that has acquired the notification (information) that the feature portion could not be extracted together with the tilt amount of the casing and the tilt direction of the casing determines that the display format needs to be switched, and The body tilt amount and the tilt direction of the housing are output to the switching processing unit 180. Thereafter, the same processing as in the case of step S110 (No) is performed, and this flowchart ends.
  • the switching determination unit 150 that has acquired the notification (information) that the feature portion of the subject could not be extracted sets the hold function to OFF and switches to the power saving mode described above.
  • step S150 If it is determined in step S150 that the temporal change amount of the feature portion of the subject is equal to or greater than the first threshold (step S150: Yes), the switching determination unit 150 needs to switch the display format of the display image. And the inclination amount of the casing and the inclination direction of the casing are output to the switching processing unit 180. Thereafter, the same processing as in the case of step S110 (No) is performed, and this flowchart ends.
  • FIG. 9 to FIG. 12 are examples illustrating the display format control processing. 9 to 12, it is assumed that both the display format switching function and the hold function are set to ON.
  • FIG. 9A shows a state where the user U is viewing the display image HG 3 (vertically long image or vertically oriented image) displayed on the touch screen 44 in the vertically oriented state.
  • FIG. 9B shows a captured image SG 3 (through image) captured by the front camera 62 in the state of FIG. 9A.
  • FIG. 9C is a display image HG 3 (vertically long image) displayed on the touch screen 44 in the state of FIG. 9A.
  • FIG. 10A shows a state in which the user U tilts only the casing by a predetermined amount or more from the state of FIG. 9A.
  • FIG. 10B shows the captured image SG 3 ′ (through image) in the case of FIG.
  • FIG. 10C is a display image HG 3 ′ (landscape image or landscape image) displayed on the touch screen 44 in the case of FIG.
  • the switching determination unit 150 determines that the temporal change amount of the characteristic portion of the subject is equal to or greater than the first threshold (step S150: Yes), and the switching processing unit 180 Control is performed so as to switch the display format of the display image in accordance with the amount of inclination and the inclination direction of the housing (step S160). That is, when only the casing is tilted by a predetermined amount or more as shown in FIG. 10, the portrait image is switched to the landscape image so that the user U can easily see (or as shown in FIGS. 4C and 4D). Switch to reduced image). When the display format switching function is set to OFF, the display format is not switched.
  • FIG. 11B shows the captured image SG 3 (through image) in the case of FIG.
  • FIG. 11C is a display image HG 3 (vertically long image) displayed on the touch screen 44 in the case of FIG.
  • the display format of the display image HG 3 in FIG. 11C is the same as the display format of the display image HG 3 in FIG.
  • the switching determination unit 150 determines that the temporal change amount of the feature portion of the subject is less than the first threshold (step S150: No), and the switching restriction unit 160 displays the display image.
  • the display format is controlled not to be switched, that is, the switching is held (step S170). That is, when the user and the housing are tilted by a predetermined amount or more as shown in FIG. 11, the portrait image is not switched to the landscape image so that the user U can easily see (or shown in FIGS. 4C and 4D). So do not switch to reduced image).
  • the display format switching function is set to ON and the hold function is set to OFF, the display format is switched.
  • FIG. 12A shows a state in which only the user U tilts himself or herself by a predetermined amount or more from the state of FIG. 9A.
  • FIG. 12B shows the captured image SG 3 ′′ (through image) in the case of FIG.
  • FIG. 12C is a display image HG 3 (vertically long image) displayed on the touch screen 44 in the case of FIG.
  • the display format of the display image HG 3 in FIG. 12C is the same as the display format of the display image HG 3 in FIG.
  • the electronic device 3 has described a mode in which the display format of the display image is controlled using an image captured by the front camera 62 (first imaging unit) that captures an object on the front side of the touch screen 44.
  • the electronic device 3 uses the image captured by the back camera 64 (second image capturing unit) that captures the subject behind the touch screen 44 in addition to the image captured by the front camera 62 to change the display format of the display image.
  • the display control unit 100 is the rate of change of the characteristic part of the subject imaged on the front side (the rate of change of the characteristic part of the subject on the image captured by the front camera 62) when the casing is tilted by a predetermined amount or more.
  • a front side change rate is calculated by calculating a front side change rate and a rear side change rate that is a change rate of the feature portion of the subject imaged on the rear side (change rate of the feature portion of the subject on the image captured by the back camera 64). Is controlled so as to change the display format of the display image, and when the forward change rate is less than the backward change rate, the display format of the display image is not changed. .
  • the display control unit 100 when the housing is tilted by a predetermined amount or more and the hold function is set to ON (the display format switching function is also set to ON), the front side change rate When the forward change rate is equal to or greater than the backward change rate, control is performed to change the display format of the display image, and the forward change rate is less than the backward change rate. Controls so as not to change the display format of the display image.
  • the display control unit 100 changes the display format of the display image when the case is tilted by a predetermined amount or more and the hold function is set to off (the display format switching function is set to on). To control.
  • FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing another example of display format control processing in the electronic apparatus 3.
  • FIG. 13 shows a processing flow in a mode in which the display format of the display image is controlled using the image captured by the back camera 64 in addition to the image captured by the front camera 62.
  • the flowchart of FIG. 13 starts when the casing is tilted by a predetermined amount or more when the display format switching function is set to ON, as in the flowchart of FIG. Whether or not the housing is inclined by a predetermined amount or more is determined by the inclination amount determination unit 120.
  • the same step numbers as those in FIG. 8 are the same processes as those in FIG.
  • the setting recognition unit 110 determines whether or not the hold function is on (step S110).
  • step S110 If the hold function is on in step S110 (step S110: Yes), the tilt amount determination unit 120 outputs the tilt amount of the housing and the tilt direction of the housing to the feature region extraction unit 130.
  • the feature region extraction unit 130 images taken by the front camera 62 before the tilt of the housing, images of the housing before and after the tilt of the housing in each of the captured images (the images taken by the front camera 62 and the images taken by the back camera 64).
  • step S122 it is determined whether or not the feature portion of the subject has been extracted from each captured image (step S132).
  • step S132 when the feature portion of the subject can be extracted from each of the captured images before and after the tilt in both captured images (step S132: Yes), the feature region extraction unit 130 determines the amount of tilt of the casing and the casing. Information indicating the characteristic part of the subject is output to the change amount calculation unit 140 along with the body tilt direction. Next, the change amount calculation unit 140 calculates temporal change rates (front-side change rate and rear-side change rate) of the characteristic portion of the subject in both captured images (step S142), and the calculated both captured images The temporal change rate of the characteristic portion is output to the switching determination unit 150 together with the amount of inclination of the casing and the inclination direction of the casing. Next, the switching determination unit 150 determines whether the front side change rate is less than the rear side change rate (step S152).
  • step S152 when it is determined that the front side change rate is less than the rear side change rate (step S152: Yes), the switching determination unit 150 determines that switching of the display format of the display image is not necessary, and the display format. Is output to the switching restriction unit 160.
  • the switching restriction unit 160 that has acquired the notification (information) that the display format is maintained controls to not switch the display format of the display image, that is, to hold the switching of the display format (step S170). Then, this flowchart ends.
  • step S110 When the hold function is not turned on in step S110 (step S110: No), the tilt amount determination unit 120 notifies that the hold function is set off together with the tilt amount of the housing and the tilt direction of the housing. (Information) is output to the switching determination unit 150. Next, the switching determination unit 150 determines that the display format needs to be switched, and outputs the tilt amount of the housing and the tilt direction of the housing to the switching processing unit 180. Next, the switching processing unit 180 performs control so as to switch the display format of the display image according to the tilt amount of the housing and the tilt direction of the housing (step S160). Then, this flowchart ends.
  • step S132 if the feature portion of the subject cannot be extracted from any of the captured images before and after the tilt of the casing in both captured images (step S132: No), the feature region extraction unit 130 determines the tilt amount of the casing, and A notification (information) indicating that the feature portion could not be extracted is output to the switching determination unit 150 together with the inclination direction of the housing.
  • the switching determination unit 150 determines that the display format needs to be switched, and outputs the tilt amount of the housing and the tilt direction of the housing to the switching processing unit 180. Thereafter, the same processing as in the case of step S110 (No) is performed, and this flowchart ends.
  • step S152 When it is determined in step S152 that the front side change rate is equal to or higher than the rear side change rate (step S152: No), the switching determination unit 150 determines that the display format of the display image needs to be switched, and the housing Are output to the switching processing unit 180. Thereafter, the same processing as in the case of step S110 (No) is performed, and this flowchart ends.
  • 14 to 17 are an example for explaining display format control processing in a mode in which the display format of the display image is controlled using the image captured by the back camera 64 in addition to the image captured by the front camera 62. 14 to 17, it is assumed that the display format switching function is set to on and the hold function is set to on.
  • FIG. 14A shows a state where the user U is viewing the display image HG 4 (vertically long image) displayed on the touch screen 44 in the portrait orientation.
  • 14 (b) is in the state of FIG. 14 (a), the captured image being captured by the front camera 62 SG 4-1 (through image), and the imaging is imaged by the back camera 64 images SG 4- 2 (through image).
  • FIG. 14C is a display image HG 4 (vertically long image) displayed on the touch screen 44 in the state of FIG.
  • FIG. 15A shows a state in which the user U tilts only the casing by a predetermined amount or more from the state of FIG.
  • FIG. 15B illustrates a captured image SG 4-1 ′ (through image) captured by the front camera 62 and a captured image SG 4 captured by the back camera 64 in the case of FIG. -2 '(through image).
  • FIG. 15B it is assumed that the front side change rate and the rear side change rate are the same.
  • FIG. 15C is a display image HG 4 ′ (horizontal image) displayed on the touch screen 44 in the case of FIG.
  • the switching determination unit 150 determines that the front side change rate is equal to or higher than the rear side change rate because the front side change rate and the rear side change rate are the same (step S152: No).
  • the switching processing unit 180 performs control so that the display format of the display image is switched according to the tilt amount of the housing and the tilt direction of the housing (step S160). That is, when only the casing is tilted by a predetermined amount or more as shown in FIG. 15, the portrait image is switched to the landscape image so that the user U can easily see (or as shown in FIGS. 4C and 4D). Switch to reduced image).
  • the display format switching function is set to OFF, the display format is not switched.
  • FIG. 16A shows a state in which the user U tilts himself or herself with a casing by a predetermined amount or more from the state of FIG. FIG. 16 (b), in the case of FIG. 16 (a), the captured image being captured by the front camera 62 SG 4-1 (through image), and the imaging is imaged by the back camera 64 images SG 4- 2 '(through image).
  • the front side change rate is less than the rear side change rate.
  • FIG. 16C is a display image HG 4 (vertically long image) displayed on the touch screen 44 in the case of FIG.
  • the display format of the display image HG 4 in FIG. 16C is the same as the display format of the display image HG 4 in FIG.
  • the switching determination unit 150 determines that the forward change rate is less than the backward change rate (step S152: Yes), and the switching restriction unit 160 does not switch the display format of the display image. That is, control is performed to hold the switching (step S170). That is, when the user and the housing are tilted by a predetermined amount or more as shown in FIG. 16, the portrait image is not switched to the landscape image so that the user U can easily see (or shown in FIGS. 4C and 4D). To switch to a reduced image). When the display format switching function is set to ON and the hold function is set to OFF, the display format is switched.
  • FIG. 17A shows a state in which the user U tilts only himself or more from the state of FIG. 14A by a predetermined amount or more.
  • FIG. 17B shows a captured image SG 4-1 ′′ (through image) captured by the front camera 62 and a captured image SG captured by the back camera 64 in the case of FIG. 4-2 (through image) is displayed.
  • the front side change rate is larger than the rear side change rate.
  • FIG. 17C is a display image HG 4 (vertically long image) displayed on the touch screen 44 in the case of FIG.
  • the display format of the display image HG 4 in FIG. 17C is the same as the display format of the display image HG 4 in FIG.
  • the screen format of the display image is controlled using the captured image captured by the back camera 64 in addition to the captured image captured by the front camera 62, the screen format is not changed unintentionally. Can be improved. In addition, there is an effect that the switching hold process can be performed with higher accuracy than when only the image captured by the front camera 62 is used. Further, even when the electronic device 4 is operated with the user lying down as shown in FIG. 5, the display format control according to the present embodiment does not cause unintended screen format switching. Can be improved. Therefore, the electronic device 4 according to the present embodiment is not affected by the posture when the user views the display image, and thus the display format can be controlled so that the display image is displayed in a direction that is easy for the user to visually recognize. is there.
  • FIG. 18 is an example of a block diagram in the display control unit 102 included in the electronic device 4 according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
  • the appearance of the electronic device 4 according to the second embodiment of the present invention is the same as the appearance of the electronic device 3 according to the first embodiment of the present invention.
  • the electronic device 4 is different from the electronic device 3 in that the processor 100 includes a display control unit 102 instead of the display control unit 100.
  • the display control unit 102 includes a setting recognition unit 112, an inclination amount determination unit 122, a feature region extraction unit 130, a change amount calculation unit 140, a switching control unit 170, and a setting unit 192. Since the feature region extraction unit 130 and the change amount calculation unit 140 included in the display control unit 102 are the same as the feature region extraction unit 130 and the change amount calculation unit 140 included in the display control unit 100 of the electronic device 3, a part of the description. Or omit all.
  • the setting unit 192 sets various information. For example, ON / OFF of a display image display format switching function is set.
  • the setting unit 192 sets on / off of a hold function, which is one of the display image display format control functions.
  • the setting unit 192 sets on / off of a follow function, which is one of the display image display format control functions.
  • the hold function on / off and the follow function on / off are referred to when the display image display format switching function is on. In other words, the hold function and the follow function are subfunctions of the display image display format switching function.
  • the setting content by the setting unit 192 is stored in the storage unit 30. The following function and the following process by the following function will be described later.
  • the setting unit 192 sets the display format switching function on / off, the hold function on / off, and the tracking function on / off automatically or according to the user's instruction.
  • the automatic setting of the hold function on / off and the automatic setting of the follow function on / off by the setting unit 192 are the same as the automatic setting of the hold function on / off by the setting unit 190 of the electronic device 3. is there.
  • the setting recognition unit 112 stores setting information stored in the storage unit 30 (display image display format switching function on / off information, hold function on / off information, tracking function on / off information). To get.
  • the setting recognition unit 112 acquires the setting information stored in the storage unit 30 in response to a request from the inclination amount determination unit 122 and outputs (responds) the setting information to the inclination amount determination unit 122.
  • the inclination amount determination unit 122 acquires the detection value from the motion sensor 50 (elevation angle sensor 56), and calculates the inclination amount of the casing (a casing body, a body, main body (a body, a main body)). Note that the tilt amount determination unit 122 may calculate the tilt amount of the housing when the display format switching function is set to ON.
  • the tilt amount determination unit 122 that calculates the tilt amount of the housing determines whether or not the housing is tilted by a predetermined amount (for example, 45 degrees or 50 degrees).
  • the tilt amount determination unit 122 does nothing when the display format switching function is set to OFF. That is, when the display format switching function is set to OFF, the display format is not switched, so that the tilt amount determination unit 122 has already calculated the tilt amount of the housing. ,do nothing.
  • the tilt amount determination unit 122 Along with the amount of inclination, the direction of inclination of the case, and the result of determination related to the amount of inclination of the case (the result of determination that the amount of inclination of the case is equal to or greater than the predetermined amount) A notification (information) is output to the switching control unit 170.
  • the tilt amount determination unit 122 A determination result related to the tilt amount, the tilt direction of the housing, and the tilt amount of the housing (determination result that the tilt amount of the housing is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount) is output to the feature region extraction unit 130.
  • the tilt amount determination unit 122 When the display format switching function is set to ON and it is determined that the casing is not tilted by a predetermined amount or more and the follow function is set to OFF, the tilt amount determination unit 122 A notification (information) indicating that the following function is set to OFF is output to the switching control unit 170 together with a determination result related to the amount of body tilt (a result of determination that the amount of tilt of the housing is less than a predetermined amount). . Note that the tilt amount determination unit 122 does not have to do anything in this case.
  • the tilt amount determination unit 122 sets the casing.
  • the determination result related to the body tilt amount, the tilt direction of the housing, and the tilt amount of the housing is output to the feature region extraction unit 130.
  • the feature region extraction unit 130 acquires a captured image captured by the front camera 62 from the camera unit 60. For example, the feature region extraction unit 130 determines a determination result regarding the amount of inclination of the casing, the inclination direction of the casing, and the amount of inclination of the casing (the determination result that the amount of inclination of the casing is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount, or When the inclination amount determination unit 122 acquires a determination result that the amount of inclination of the casing is less than a predetermined amount), the captured images before and after the inclination of the casing are acquired from the camera unit 60.
  • the feature region extraction unit 130 determines that the display format switching function and the hold function are set to ON and the casing is tilted by a predetermined amount or more, or the display format switching function, and When the follow function is set to ON and it is determined that the casing is not tilted by a predetermined amount or more, captured images before and after the tilt of the casing are acquired from the camera unit 60.
  • the feature area extracting unit 130 extracts the feature portion of the subject from the captured images before and after the tilt of the housing.
  • the feature region extraction unit 130 can extract the feature portion of the subject from the respective captured images before and after the tilt of the casing, the tilt amount of the casing acquired from the tilt amount determination unit 122, the tilt direction of the casing, And the information which shows the characteristic part of the to-be-photographed object extracted from each captured image before and behind inclination with the determination result regarding the amount of inclination of a housing
  • the feature region extraction unit 130 obtains from the tilt amount determination unit 122 when the feature portion of the subject cannot be extracted from at least one of the captured image before tilting the housing and the captured image after tilting the housing.
  • a notification (information) indicating that the feature portion could not be extracted is output to the switching control unit 170 together with the determination result relating to the tilt amount of the casing, the tilt direction of the casing, and the tilt amount of the casing.
  • the change amount calculation unit 140 acquires, from the feature region extraction unit 130, the determination result related to the amount of inclination of the housing, the inclination direction of the housing, the amount of inclination of the housing, and the feature portion of the subject extracted from each captured image. In such a case, the temporal change amount of the feature portion in each captured image is calculated.
  • the change amount calculation unit 140 that calculates the temporal change amount of the feature portion of the subject determines the amount of inclination of the casing, the inclination direction of the casing, and the amount of inclination of the casing acquired from the feature region extraction unit 130. Together with the result, the temporal change amount of the characteristic part is output to the switching control unit 170.
  • the switching control unit 170 controls switching of the display format of the display image.
  • the switching control unit 170 has a determination result related to the amount of inclination of the case, the direction of inclination of the case, the amount of inclination of the case (determination result that the amount of inclination of the case is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount), and a hold function.
  • a notification information indicating that it is set to OFF is acquired from the tilt amount determination unit 122, it is determined that the display format needs to be switched.
  • the switching control unit 170 determines the determination result related to the tilt amount of the casing (the determination result that the tilt amount of the casing is less than the predetermined amount) and the notification (information) that the following function is set to off. Is obtained from the tilt amount determination unit 122, it is determined that the display format switching is unnecessary.
  • the switching control unit 170 determines the amount of inclination of the housing, the direction of inclination of the housing, the determination result related to the amount of inclination of the housing (the determination result that the amount of inclination of the housing is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount), and the characteristic portion.
  • a notification (information) indicating that extraction has failed is acquired from the feature region extraction unit 130, it is determined that the display format needs to be switched.
  • the switching control unit 170 displays the determination result related to the amount of inclination of the housing, the direction of inclination of the housing, the amount of inclination of the housing (the determination result that the amount of inclination of the housing is less than a predetermined amount), and the characteristic portion.
  • a notification (information) indicating that extraction has failed is acquired from the feature region extraction unit 130, it is determined that display format switching is unnecessary.
  • the switching control unit 170 determines the determination result related to the amount of inclination of the case, the inclination direction of the case, and the amount of inclination of the case (the determination result that the amount of inclination of the case is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount, or the case The determination result that the amount is less than the predetermined amount) and the temporal change amount of the feature portion from the change amount calculation unit 140, the temporal change amount of the feature portion and the first threshold value or The second threshold value is compared, and whether or not it is necessary to switch the display format of the display image is determined based on the comparison result relating to the change amount of the characteristic portion and the determination result relating to the inclination amount of the housing.
  • the switching control unit 170 determines that the display format needs to be switched, and the temporal change amount of the feature portion of the subject is the first. When it is less than the threshold value of 1, it is determined that it is not necessary to switch the display format of the display image.
  • the switching control unit 170 determines that the display format needs to be switched (in other words, the hold process is unnecessary), and the temporal change amount of the feature portion of the subject is less than the first threshold value.
  • the switching control unit 170 determines that switching of the display format of the display image is unnecessary (in other words, hold processing is necessary).
  • the first threshold value to be compared with the temporal change amount of the characteristic portion of the subject is the same as that in the first embodiment when the user tilts the housing by rotating the housing. Is a value for determining whether or not the user's own face (for example, a straight line connecting both eyes) is intentionally tilted with (in conjunction with) the tilt of the housing.
  • the switching control unit 170 determines that the display format needs to be switched, and the temporal change amount of the feature portion is less than the second threshold value. If it is, it is determined that it is not necessary to switch the display format of the display image. That is, when it is determined that the casing is not inclined more than the predetermined amount and the follow function is set to ON, the temporal change amount of the feature portion of the subject is equal to or larger than the second threshold value.
  • the switching control unit 170 determines that the display format needs to be switched (in other words, the tracking process is necessary), and the temporal change amount of the feature portion of the subject is less than the second threshold value. In this case, the switching control unit 170 determines that switching of the display format of the display image is unnecessary (in other words, no follow-up process is required).
  • the second threshold value to be compared with the temporal change amount of the characteristic part of the subject is that when the user does not tilt the case by rotating the case, the user has his face (for example, This is a value for determining whether or not the straight line connecting both eyes is intentionally inclined.
  • An example in which the user's face is intentionally inclined when the casing is not inclined is, for example, a case as shown in FIG. In the case of FIG. 5C, the amount of change in the characteristic portion of the subject is 60 degrees.
  • the second threshold value may be an angle of around 45 degrees. For example, when the second threshold is set to 50 degrees, when the user tilts only the face by 50 degrees or more without tilting the housing, the amount of change is equal to or greater than the second threshold, and the follow-up process works.
  • the switching control unit 170 determines that switching of the display format is not necessary, the switching control unit 170 outputs a notification (information) to the effect that the display format is maintained to the switching processing unit 180. If the switching control unit 170 determines that the display format needs to be switched, the switching control unit 170 outputs the amount of inclination of the housing and the direction of inclination of the housing to the switching processing unit 180.
  • the switching processing unit 180 When the notification (information) indicating that the display format is maintained is acquired from the switching control unit 170, the switching processing unit 180 performs control so that the display format of the display image is not switched (for example, nothing is performed). In addition, when the switching processing unit 180 acquires the tilt amount of the casing and the tilt direction of the casing from the switching control unit 170, the switching processing unit 180 displays the display image according to the tilt amount of the casing and the tilt direction of the casing. Control to switch the display format.
  • the display control unit 102 determines that the case is tilted by a predetermined amount or more, and if the display format switching function and the hold function are set to ON, the subject The display format of the display image on the touch screen 44 is selectively switched in accordance with the temporal change amount of the feature portion. In addition, the display control unit 102 determines that the case is not tilted by a predetermined amount or more, and if the display format switching function and the follow function are set to ON, the display control unit 102 The display format of the display image on the touch screen 44 is selectively switched according to the temporal change amount of the characteristic portion.
  • FIG. 19 is an example of a flowchart showing the flow of display format control processing in the electronic device 4.
  • the flowchart in FIG. 19 starts when the housing is tilted (it may not be a predetermined amount or more) when the display format switching function is set to ON.
  • the tilt amount determination unit 122 determines whether or not the housing is tilted by a predetermined amount or more (step S200). If it is determined in step S200 that the casing is tilted by a predetermined amount or more, the following steps S210 to S270 are executed. If it is determined in step S200 that the housing is not inclined more than the predetermined amount, the following steps S310 to S370 are executed.
  • step S210 When it is determined in step S200 that the housing is tilted by a predetermined amount or more (step S200: Yes), the setting recognition unit 112 (or the tilt amount determination unit 122) refers to the storage unit 30 and the hold function is on. It is determined whether or not (step S210).
  • step S210 When the hold function is turned on in step S210 (step S210: Yes), the tilt amount determination unit 122 determines the determination result (the case of the tilt amount of the casing, the tilt direction of the casing, and the tilt amount of the casing). Is output to the feature area extraction unit 130.
  • the feature region extraction unit 130 tries to extract the feature portion of the subject from each of the captured images before and after the inclination of the casing (step S220), and determines whether the feature portion of the subject has been extracted from each of them (step S220) Step S230).
  • step S230 when the feature portion of the subject can be extracted from each of them (step S230: Yes), the feature region extraction unit 130 determines the amount of inclination of the housing, the direction of inclination of the housing, and the amount of inclination of the housing. Together with the determination result (determination result indicating that the amount of inclination of the housing is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount), information indicating the characteristic part of the subject is output to the change amount calculation unit 140.
  • the change amount calculation unit 140 calculates a temporal change amount of the characteristic portion of the subject (step S240), and the calculated change amount is calculated based on the inclination amount of the casing, the inclination direction of the casing, and the It outputs to the switching control part 170 with the determination result which concerns on the amount of inclinations.
  • the switching control unit 170 determines whether or not the temporal change amount of the feature portion of the subject is greater than or equal to the first threshold (step S250).
  • step S250 If it is determined in step S250 that the temporal change amount of the characteristic portion of the subject is less than the first threshold (step S250: No), the switching control unit 170 does not need to switch the display format of the display image. And a notification (information) to maintain the display format is output to the switching processing unit 180.
  • the switching processing unit 180 that has acquired the notification (information) to maintain the display format holds the current display format (does nothing) (step S270). Then, this flowchart ends. Note that the rectangle in step S270 is a broken line indicates that the switching processing unit 180 does not have to do anything.
  • step S210 determines the determination result (the casing's tilt amount, the tilt direction of the casing, and the tilt amount of the casing).
  • a determination result indicating that the tilt amount is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount) and a notification (information) indicating that the hold function is set to OFF are output to the switching control unit 170.
  • the switching control unit 170 that has acquired the notification (information) that the hold function is set to OFF together with the determination result related to the tilt amount of the housing, the tilt direction of the housing, and the tilt amount of the housing It is determined that it is necessary to switch the format, and the amount of inclination of the casing and the inclination direction of the casing are output to the switching processing unit 180.
  • the switching processing unit 180 that acquires the tilt amount of the housing and the tilt direction of the housing controls the display image display format to be switched according to the tilt amount of the housing and the tilt direction of the housing ( Step S260). Then, this flowchart ends.
  • step S230 when the feature portion of the subject cannot be extracted from at least one of the captured images before and after the tilt of the casing (step S230: No), the feature region extraction unit 130 determines the tilt amount of the casing, the casing Switch the notification (information) that the feature portion could not be extracted, together with the determination result related to the inclination direction of the case and the determination result related to the amount of inclination of the case (determination result that the amount of inclination of the case is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount) Output to the unit 170.
  • the switching control unit 170 that has acquired the notification (information) that the feature portion could not be extracted together with the determination result related to the tilt amount of the housing, the tilt direction of the housing, and the tilt amount of the housing, It is determined that switching is necessary, and the amount of inclination of the casing and the direction of inclination of the casing are output to the switching processing unit 180. Thereafter, the same processing as that in the case of step S210 (No) is performed, and this flowchart ends.
  • step S250 If it is determined in step S250 that the temporal change amount of the characteristic portion of the subject is equal to or greater than the first threshold (step S250: Yes), the switching control unit 170 needs to switch the display format of the display image. And the inclination amount of the casing and the inclination direction of the casing are output to the switching processing unit 180. Thereafter, the same processing as that in the case of step S210 (No) is performed, and this flowchart ends.
  • step S310 When it is determined in step S200 that the casing is not inclined more than a predetermined amount (step S200: No), the setting recognition unit 112 (or the inclination amount determination unit 122) refers to the storage unit 30 and the follow function is turned on. Is determined (step S310).
  • step S310 determines the determination result regarding the tilt amount of the casing, the tilt direction of the casing, and the tilt amount of the casing (the casing). Is output to the feature region extraction unit 130 as a result of determination that the inclination amount is less than a predetermined amount.
  • the feature region extraction unit 130 tries to extract the feature portion of the subject from each of the captured images before and after the inclination of the casing (step S320), and determines whether the feature portion of the subject has been extracted from each of them (step S320). Step S330).
  • step S330 when the feature portion of the subject can be extracted from each of them (step S330: Yes), the feature region extraction unit 130 determines the tilt amount of the casing, the tilt direction of the casing, and the tilt amount of the casing. Together with the determination result (determination result that the amount of inclination of the housing is less than the predetermined amount) and information indicating the characteristic part of the subject are output to the change amount calculation unit 140.
  • the change amount calculation unit 140 calculates a temporal change amount of the characteristic portion of the subject (step S340), and uses the calculated change amount as a tilt amount of the casing, a tilt direction of the casing, It outputs to the switching control part 170 with the determination result which concerns on the amount of inclinations.
  • the switching control unit 170 determines whether or not the temporal change amount of the feature portion of the subject is equal to or greater than the second threshold (step S350).
  • step S350 If it is determined in step S350 that the temporal change amount of the feature portion of the subject is equal to or greater than the second threshold (step S350: Yes), the switching control unit 170 needs to switch the display format of the display image. And the tilt amount of the casing and the tilt direction of the casing are output to the switching processing unit 180.
  • the switching processing unit 180 that acquires the tilt amount of the housing and the tilt direction of the housing controls the display image display format to be switched according to the tilt amount of the housing and the tilt direction of the housing ( Step S360). For example, the switching processing unit 180 determines a display format (display format after switching) based on the tilt amount of the housing and the tilt direction of the housing, and outputs the determined display format to the touch screen controller 42. . Then, this flowchart ends.
  • step S310 determines the determination result regarding the tilt amount of the housing, the tilt direction of the housing, and the tilt amount of the housing (for the housing).
  • a determination result indicating that the inclination amount is less than the predetermined amount) and a notification (information) indicating that the following function is set to OFF are output to the switching control unit 170.
  • the switching processing unit 180 that has acquired the notification (information) to maintain the display format does nothing (step S370). Then, this flowchart ends. Note that the rectangle in step S370 is a broken line, indicating that the switching processing unit 180 does not have to do anything.
  • step S330 when the feature portion of the subject cannot be extracted from at least one of the captured images before and after the tilt of the casing (step S330: No), the feature region extraction unit 130 determines the tilt amount of the casing, the casing Switch the notification (information) that the feature portion could not be extracted, together with the determination result regarding the inclination direction of the case and the determination result related to the amount of inclination of the case (determination result that the amount of inclination of the case is less than the predetermined amount) Output to the unit 170.
  • the switching control unit 170 that has acquired the notification (information) that the feature portion could not be extracted together with the determination result related to the tilt amount of the housing, the tilt direction of the housing, and the tilt amount of the housing, It is determined that switching is not necessary, and a notification (information) to maintain the display format is output to the switching processing unit 180. Thereafter, the same processing as in the case of step S310 (No) is performed, and this flowchart is ended.
  • step S350 If it is determined in step S350 that the temporal change amount of the characteristic portion of the subject is less than the second threshold (step S350: No), the switching control unit 170 does not need to switch the display format of the display image. And a notification (information) to maintain the display format is output to the switching processing unit 180. Thereafter, the same processing as in the case of step S310 (No) is performed, and this flowchart is ended.
  • step S270 in FIG. 19 processing in steps S222 to S270 in FIG. 20 described later may be included.
  • the electronic device 4 uses the image captured by the back camera 64 (second image capturing unit) that captures the subject on the rear side of the touch screen 44, in addition to the image captured by the front camera 62, similarly to the electronic device 3.
  • the display format of the display image may be controlled.
  • the display control unit 102 calculates the front side change rate and the rear side change rate when it is not inclined by a predetermined amount or more, and when the front side change rate is equal to or higher than the rear side change rate, the display format of the display image If the front side change rate is less than the rear side change rate, control is performed to change the display format of the display image.
  • the display control unit 102 when the case is not tilted by a predetermined amount or more and the follow function is set to ON (the display format switching function is also set to ON), the display control unit 102 When the rear side change rate is calculated and the front side change rate is equal to or greater than the rear side change rate, control is performed so as not to change the display format of the display image, and the front side change rate is less than the rear side change rate. Controls to change the display format of the display image.
  • the display control unit 102 displays the display format of the display image when the follower function is set to off (the display format switching function is set to on) when the casing is not inclined more than a predetermined amount. Control so as not to change
  • FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing another example of display format control processing in the electronic apparatus 4.
  • FIG. 20 illustrates a processing flow in a mode in which the display format of the display image is controlled using the image captured by the back camera 64 in addition to the image captured by the front camera 62.
  • the flowchart in FIG. 20 starts when the casing is tilted (it may not be a predetermined amount or more) when the display format switching function is set to ON, as in the flowchart in FIG.
  • the same step numbers as in FIG. 19 are the same processes as in FIG.
  • the tilt amount determination unit 122 determines whether or not the casing is tilted by a predetermined amount or more (step S200). If it is determined in step S200 that the casing is tilted by a predetermined amount or more, the following steps S210 to S270 are executed. If it is determined in step S200 that the housing is not inclined more than the predetermined amount, the following steps S310 to S370 are executed.
  • step S200 When it is determined in step S200 that the housing is tilted by a predetermined amount or more (step S200: Yes), the setting recognition unit 112 (or the tilt amount determination unit 122) determines whether or not the hold function is on (step). S210).
  • step S210 determines the determination result (the case of the tilt amount of the casing, the tilt direction of the casing, and the tilt amount of the casing). Is output to the feature area extraction unit 130.
  • the feature region extraction unit 130 images taken by the front camera 62 before the tilt of the housing, images of the housing before and after the tilt of the housing in each of the captured images (the images taken by the front camera 62 and the images taken by the back camera 64).
  • step S222 it is determined whether or not the feature portion of the subject has been extracted from each captured image (step S232).
  • step S232 when the feature portion of the subject can be extracted from each of the captured images before and after the inclination in both captured images (step S232: Yes), the feature region extraction unit 130 determines the amount of inclination of the casing, Information indicating the characteristic part of the subject is output to the change amount calculation unit 140 together with the determination result related to the tilt direction and the tilt amount of the casing (the determination result that the tilt amount of the casing is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount).
  • the change amount calculation unit 140 calculates a temporal change rate (a front side change rate and a rear side change rate) of the characteristic portion of the subject in both captured images (step S242).
  • step S252 when the forward change rate is less than the backward change rate (step S152: Yes), the switching control unit 170 determines that switching of the display format of the display image is unnecessary, and maintains the display format. A notification (information) to that effect is output to the switching processing unit 180. The switching processing unit 180 that has acquired the notification (information) to maintain the display format holds the current display format (does nothing) (step S270). Then, this flowchart ends.
  • step S210 determines the determination result (the casing's tilt amount, the tilt direction of the casing, and the tilt amount of the casing).
  • a determination result indicating that the tilt amount is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount) and a notification (information) indicating that the hold function is set to OFF are output to the switching control unit 170.
  • the switching control unit 170 determines that the display format needs to be switched, and outputs the tilt amount of the housing and the tilt direction of the housing to the switching processing unit 180.
  • the switching processing unit 180 that acquires the tilt amount of the housing and the tilt direction of the housing controls the display image display format to be switched according to the tilt amount of the housing and the tilt direction of the housing ( Step S260). Then, this flowchart ends.
  • step S232 when the feature portion of the subject cannot be extracted from any of the captured images before and after the tilt of the casing in both captured images (step S232: No), the feature area extraction unit 130 determines the tilt amount of the casing. In addition, the control unit switches the notification that the feature portion could not be extracted together with the determination result regarding the tilt direction of the casing and the determination result regarding the tilt amount of the casing (the determination result that the tilt amount of the casing is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount). Output to the unit 170. Next, the switching control unit 170 determines that the display format needs to be switched, and outputs the tilt amount of the housing and the tilt direction of the housing to the switching processing unit 180. Thereafter, the same processing as that in the case of step S210 (No) is performed, and this flowchart ends.
  • step S252 when the front side change rate is equal to or higher than the rear side change rate (step S252: No), the switching control unit 170 determines that the display format of the display image needs to be switched, and the amount of inclination of the housing And the tilt direction of the housing is output to the switching processing unit 180. Thereafter, the same processing as that in the case of step S210 (No) is performed, and this flowchart ends.
  • step S310 When it is determined in step S200 that the housing is not inclined more than the predetermined amount (step S200: No), the setting recognition unit 112 (or the inclination amount determination unit 122) determines whether or not the following function is on. (Step S310).
  • step S310 determines the determination result regarding the tilt amount of the casing, the tilt direction of the casing, and the tilt amount of the casing (the casing). Is output to the feature region extraction unit 130 as a result of determination that the inclination amount is less than a predetermined amount.
  • the feature region extraction unit 130 tries to extract the feature portion of the subject from each of the captured images before and after the inclination in both captured images (step S322), and whether or not the feature portion of the subject has been extracted from each captured image. Is determined (step S332).
  • step S332 when the feature portion of the subject can be extracted from each of the captured images before and after the inclination in both captured images (step S332: Yes), the feature region extraction unit 130 determines the amount of inclination of the casing, Information indicating the characteristic part of the subject is output to the change amount calculation unit 140 together with the determination result related to the tilt direction and the tilt amount of the casing (the determination result that the tilt amount of the casing is less than the predetermined amount).
  • the change amount calculation unit 140 calculates a temporal change rate of the characteristic part of the subject in both captured images (step S342), and uses the calculated change rate as a tilt amount of the housing, a tilt direction of the housing, and And a determination result relating to the amount of inclination of the housing (a result of determination that the amount of inclination of the housing is less than a predetermined amount) is output to the switching control unit 170.
  • the switching control unit 170 determines whether or not the front side change rate is less than the rear side change rate (step S352).
  • step S352 when the front side change rate is equal to or higher than the rear side change rate (step S352: No), the switching control unit 170 determines that the display format of the display image needs to be switched, and the amount of inclination of the housing And the tilt direction of the housing is output to the switching processing unit 180.
  • the switching processing unit 180 that acquires the tilt amount of the housing and the tilt direction of the housing controls the display image display format to be switched according to the tilt amount of the housing and the tilt direction of the housing ( Step S360). Then, this flowchart ends.
  • step S310 determines the determination result regarding the tilt amount of the housing, the tilt direction of the housing, and the tilt amount of the housing (for the housing).
  • a determination result indicating that the inclination amount is less than the predetermined amount) and a notification (information) indicating that the following function is set to OFF are output to the switching control unit 170.
  • the switching control unit 170 determines that switching of the display format is unnecessary, and outputs a notification (information) to the effect that the display format is maintained to the switching processing unit 180.
  • the switching processing unit 180 that has acquired the notification to maintain the display format does nothing (step S370). Then, this flowchart ends.
  • step S332 when the feature portion of the subject cannot be extracted from any of the captured images before and after the tilt of the casing in both captured images (step S332: No), the feature region extraction unit 130 determines the tilt amount of the casing. , The tilt direction of the casing, and the determination result related to the tilt amount of the casing (determination result indicating that the tilt amount of the casing is equal to or greater than the predetermined amount) and notification that the feature portion could not be extracted (information) Is output to the switching control unit 170. Next, the switching control unit 170 determines that switching of the display format is unnecessary, and outputs a notification (information) to the effect that the display format is maintained to the switching processing unit 180. Thereafter, processing similar to that in the case of step S3310 (No) is performed, and this flowchart ends.
  • step S352 when the forward change rate is less than the backward change rate (step S352: Yes), the switching control unit 170 determines that switching of the display format of the display image is not necessary, and maintains the display format. A notification (information) to that effect is output to the switching processing unit 180. Thereafter, the same processing as in the case of step S310 (No) is performed, and this flowchart is ended.
  • FIG. 21 and 22 are examples illustrating the display format control processing.
  • FIG. 21 is an example of the following function in the aspect of controlling the display format of the display image using the image captured by the front camera 62.
  • FIG. 22 is an example of a mode following function that controls the display format of the display image using the image captured by the back camera 64 in addition to the image captured by the front camera 62. 21 and 22, it is assumed that all of the display format switching function, the hold function, and the following function are set to ON.
  • the hold function is the same as that of the electronic device 3 according to the first embodiment.
  • FIG. 21A shows a state in which only the user U is inclined by a predetermined amount or more from the state of FIG. 9A, as in FIG.
  • FIG. 21B shows a captured image SG 3 ′′ (through image) in the case of FIG.
  • FIG. 21C is a display image HG 3 ′ (horizontal image) displayed on the touch screen 44 in the case of FIG.
  • the switching control unit 170 determines that the temporal change amount of the feature portion of the subject is equal to or greater than the second threshold when the casing is not tilted by a predetermined amount or more (step (S350: Yes), the switching processing unit 180 performs control so as to switch the display format of the display image according to the tilt amount of the housing and the tilt direction of the housing (step S360).
  • FIG. 22A shows a state in which only the user U tilts himself or herself by a predetermined amount or more from the state of FIG. 22B shows a captured image SG 4-1 ′′ (through image) captured by the front camera 62 and a captured image SG captured by the back camera 64 in the case of FIG. 22A. 4-2 (through image) is displayed.
  • the front side change rate is larger than the rear side change rate.
  • FIG. 22C is a display image HG 4 ′ (horizontal image) displayed on the touch screen 44 in the case of FIG.
  • the switching control unit 170 determines that the front side change rate is equal to or higher than the rear side change rate when the housing is not tilted by a predetermined amount or more (step S352: No), and the switching is performed.
  • the processing unit 180 performs control so as to switch the display format of the display image in accordance with the tilt amount of the housing and the tilt direction of the housing (step S360).
  • an unintended screen format (screen display type) is not switched, user convenience can be improved.
  • the display function switching as illustrated in FIG. 4 is not caused by the hold function.
  • User convenience can be improved.
  • the display screen display format is switched by the following function as illustrated in FIG. Can be improved.
  • an easy-to-view display screen is provided according to the usage state of the user, and the user Improved convenience.
  • a part of the processing of the electronic device 3 may be executed by an external device (for example, a server) to control the display format of the electronic device 3.
  • a part of the processing of the electronic device 4 may be executed by an external device (for example, a server) to control the display format of the electronic device 4.
  • FIG. 23 is a schematic configuration diagram of the information system 1.
  • 24A and 24B are examples of a block diagram in the display control unit 104 included in the electronic device 5 and a block diagram in the display control information generation unit 200 included in the server 9.
  • the information system 1 includes an electronic device 5 and a server 9 as shown in FIG.
  • the electronic device 5 and the server 9 are connected by a wired or wireless network.
  • the electronic device 5 includes a touch screen 44, an imaging unit (a first imaging unit and a second imaging unit), and a communication unit 70, like the electronic device 3 according to the first embodiment. More specifically, the configuration of the electronic device 5 is the same as the configuration of the electronic device 3 according to the first embodiment except that the display control unit 104 is provided instead of the display control unit 100.
  • the display control unit 104 includes a setting unit 194 (similar to the setting unit 190 of the electronic device 3 or the setting unit 192 of the electronic device 4) as illustrated in FIG. 24A.
  • the communication unit 70 transmits the image captured by the imaging unit and the amount of inclination of the housing to the server 9 and receives display control information for controlling the display format of the display image on the touch screen 44 from the server 9.
  • the server 9 includes a communication unit 270 and a display control information generation unit 200 as shown in FIG. 24A.
  • the display control information generation unit 200 includes a setting recognition unit 110, a tilt amount determination unit 120, a feature region extraction unit 130, a change amount calculation unit 140, and a switching determination unit 150 of the display control unit 100 of the electronic device 3 according to the first embodiment.
  • the switching restriction unit 160 and the switching processing unit 180 (or the setting recognition unit 112, the tilt amount determination unit 122, the feature region extraction unit 130, and the change amount calculation unit 140 of the display control unit 102 of the electronic device 4 according to the second embodiment. It has the same function as the switching control unit 170 and the switching processing unit 180).
  • the communication unit 270 receives the captured image and the amount of inclination of the housing from the electronic device 5. In addition, the communication unit 270 transmits display control information to the electronic device 5.
  • the display control information generation unit 200 generates display control information to be transmitted to the electronic device 5 based on the temporal change amount of the feature portion of the subject included in the captured image received from the electronic device 5.
  • the display control information is information indicating the display format of the display image (corresponding to information output from the switching processing unit 180 of the electronic device 3 (electronic device 4) to the touch screen controller 42).
  • the setting information (for example, hold function on / off information) of the electronic device 5 may be stored in the server 9 or may be stored in the storage unit 30.
  • the display control information generation unit 200 of the server 9 receives setting information from the electronic device 5 as necessary, and refers to it when generating display control information.
  • the display control unit 104 of the electronic device 5 includes a setting recognition unit 110 (112), an inclination amount determination unit 120 (122), and a feature region extraction unit 130 in addition to the setting unit 194, as shown in FIG. 24B. May be.
  • the display control information generation unit 200 of the server 9 does not include the setting recognition unit 110 (112), the inclination amount determination unit 120 (122), and the feature region extraction unit 130 as illustrated in FIG. 24B. Also good.
  • the electronic device 5 includes the feature region extraction unit 130 and the like
  • the electronic device 5 has the processing result (for example, the hold function is set to off) instead of the captured image.
  • Notification) or processing result of the feature area extraction unit 130 (information indicating the feature portion of the subject or notification that the feature portion could not be extracted) is transmitted to the server 9.
  • the display control information generation unit 200 of the server 9 generates display control information using a processing result acquired from the electronic device 5 instead of the captured image.
  • the electronic device 3 when the display format of the display image is not controlled using the image captured by the back camera 64, the electronic device 3 does not have the back camera 64. May be.
  • the hold process may be performed only on the face stored in advance. That is, the feature of the subject extracted by the feature region extraction unit 130 from the captured image captured by the front camera 62 when the display format switching function and the hold function are set to ON and the casing is tilted by a predetermined amount or more.
  • the hold process is executed (that is, the display format is not switched), and the feature portion is stored in the pre-stored facial feature portion.
  • the hold process may not be executed (that is, the display format may be switched)
  • the following process may be performed only on the face stored in advance.
  • a program for executing processing of the electronic device 3 and the electronic device 4 according to the embodiment of the present invention is recorded on a computer-readable recording medium, and the program recorded on the recording medium is read into a computer system, By executing, the above-described various processes related to the electronic device 3 and the electronic device 4 according to the embodiment of the present invention may be performed.
  • the “computer system” may include an OS and hardware such as peripheral devices.
  • the “computer system” includes a homepage providing environment (or display environment) if a WWW system is used.
  • the “computer-readable recording medium” refers to a floppy (registered trademark) disk, a magneto-optical disk, an SD card, a writable nonvolatile memory such as a flash memory, a portable medium such as a CD-ROM, and a computer system.
  • a built-in storage device such as a hard disk.
  • the “computer-readable recording medium” means a volatile memory (for example, DRAM (Dynamic DRAM) in a computer system that becomes a server or a client when a program is transmitted through a network such as the Internet or a communication line such as a telephone line. Random Access Memory)), etc., which hold programs for a certain period of time.
  • the program may be transmitted from a computer system storing the program in a storage device or the like to another computer system via a transmission medium or by a transmission wave in the transmission medium.
  • the “transmission medium” for transmitting the program refers to a medium having a function of transmitting information, such as a network (communication network) such as the Internet or a communication line (communication line) such as a telephone line.
  • the program may be for realizing a part of the functions described above. Furthermore, what can implement
  • Inclination amount determination part 130 ... Feature area extraction part 140 ... Change amount calculation part 150 ... Switching determination part 160 ; Switching restriction part ( Rudo portion) 170 ... the switching control unit 180 ... switching unit 190, 192 ... setting unit 200 ... display control information generating section 270 ... communication unit

Abstract

An electronic device is provided with: a display unit for displaying a display image based on display data; an image capture unit which can capture an image of a subject in front of the display unit; and a display control unit for controlling the display format of the display image in accordance with the amount of change over time of a feature portion of the subject which has been captured in front.

Description

電子機器、情報システム及びサーバElectronic device, information system and server
 本発明は、電子機器、情報システム及びサーバに関するものである。
 本願は、2011年11月10日に出願された日本特許出願2011-246571号に基づき優先権を主張し、その内容をここに援用する。
The present invention relates to an electronic device, an information system, and a server.
This application claims priority based on Japanese Patent Application No. 2011-246571 filed on November 10, 2011, the contents of which are incorporated herein by reference.
 デジタルカメラ、携帯電話やスマートフォンなどの携帯端末の普及に伴い、携帯端末を利用してインターネット、ニュースや新聞記事などの情報を取得して画面に表示させるアプリケーションや技術が知られている。このような技術は、省スペースで、かつ電子情報をいつでもどこでも簡単に取得することができることから、ユーザの利便性を向上させ、情報の迅速な取得及び活用などに利用されている。
 上述のような携帯端末において、画面に表示される情報は画面横型又は縦型に表示される。また、画面横型又は縦型に情報を表示可能な携帯端末として、端末の傾きや方向などの表示状態に応じて画面横型や縦型のような画面表示型を切り替えて該情報を表示可能な携帯端末が知られている(例えば、特許文献1参照)。
With the widespread use of mobile terminals such as digital cameras, mobile phones and smartphones, applications and techniques for acquiring information such as the Internet, news and newspaper articles using mobile terminals and displaying them on the screen are known. Such a technique is space-saving and can easily acquire electronic information anytime and anywhere. Therefore, it improves the convenience of the user and is used for quick acquisition and utilization of information.
In the portable terminal as described above, information displayed on the screen is displayed in a horizontal or vertical screen. In addition, as a portable terminal capable of displaying information horizontally or vertically, a portable terminal capable of displaying the information by switching the screen display type such as the horizontal screen or vertical depending on the display state such as the tilt or direction of the terminal. A terminal is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1).
特開2007-017596号公報JP 2007-017596 A
 しかしながら、例えば、画面横型や縦型を切り換えて該情報を表示可能な携帯端末をユーザが使用する時に、ユーザによる携帯端末の動作に対して意図しない画面表示型に切り替わる場合がある。このようなユーザの意図しない画面表示型の切り替えが生じた場合、ユーザは意図する画面表示型に切り替えるために携帯端末に対して新たな動作を行う必要がある。意図しない画面表示型の切り替えはユーザの利便性を低下させる要因となっていた。 However, for example, when a user uses a mobile terminal that can display the information by switching between a horizontal screen and a vertical screen, the screen may be switched to an unintended screen display type for the operation of the mobile terminal by the user. When such a screen display type unintended by the user occurs, the user needs to perform a new operation on the mobile terminal in order to switch to the intended screen display type. Unintentional switching of the screen display type has been a factor that reduces user convenience.
 本発明の一態様である電子機器は、表示データに基づく表示画像を表示する表示部と、前記表示部の前方側の被写体を撮像可能な撮像部と、前記前方側を撮像した被写体の特徴部分の時間的な変化量に基づいて、前記表示画像の表示形式を制御する表示制御部とを備えることを特徴とする。 An electronic device according to one embodiment of the present invention includes a display unit that displays a display image based on display data, an imaging unit that can image a subject on the front side of the display unit, and a characteristic portion of the subject that images the front side And a display control unit that controls a display format of the display image based on a temporal change amount of the display image.
 本発明の他の態様である情報システムは、電子機器と、サーバとを含む情報システムであって、前記電子機器は、表示データに基づく表示画像を表示する表示部と、前記表示部の前方側の被写体を撮像可能な撮像部と、前記撮像部による撮像画像を前記サーバに送信し、前記表示画像の表示形式を制御する表示制御情報を前記サーバから受信する通信部とを備え、前記サーバは、前記電子機器から前記撮像画像を受信し、前記電子機器に前記表示制御情報を送信する通信部と、前記電子機器から受信した撮像画像に含まれる被写体の特徴部分の時間的な変化量に基づいて、前記電子機器に送信する前記表示制御情報を生成する表示制御情報生成部とを備えることを特徴とする。 An information system according to another aspect of the present invention is an information system including an electronic device and a server, and the electronic device includes a display unit that displays a display image based on display data, and a front side of the display unit. An imaging unit capable of imaging the subject, and a communication unit that transmits a captured image by the imaging unit to the server and receives display control information for controlling a display format of the display image from the server. A communication unit that receives the captured image from the electronic device and transmits the display control information to the electronic device, and a temporal change amount of a feature portion of a subject included in the captured image received from the electronic device. And a display control information generation unit that generates the display control information to be transmitted to the electronic device.
 本発明の他の態様であるサーバは、表示データに基づく表示画像を表示する表示部と、前記表示部の前方側の被写体を撮像可能な撮像部と、通信部とを備える電子機器と通信するサーバであって、前記電子機器から前記撮像画像を受信し、前記電子機器に前記表示制御情報を送信する通信部と、前記電子機器から受信した撮像画像に含まれる被写体の特徴部分の時間的な変化量に基づいて、前記電子機器に送信する前記表示制御情報を生成する表示制御情報生成部と
を備えることを特徴とする。
A server according to another aspect of the present invention communicates with an electronic device including a display unit that displays a display image based on display data, an imaging unit that can capture a subject in front of the display unit, and a communication unit. A communication unit that receives the captured image from the electronic device and transmits the display control information to the electronic device; and a temporal feature of a subject portion included in the captured image received from the electronic device. And a display control information generation unit configured to generate the display control information to be transmitted to the electronic device based on a change amount.
 本発明の態様によれば、意図しない画面表示型の切り替えが生じず、ユーザの利便性を向上させることができる。 According to the aspect of the present invention, unintended screen display type switching does not occur, and user convenience can be improved.
本発明の第1の実施形態による電子機器の外観模式図である。It is an external appearance schematic diagram of the electronic device by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. 本発明の第1の実施形態による電子機器の外観模式図である。It is an external appearance schematic diagram of the electronic device by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. 本実施形態における電子機器のブロック図の一例である。It is an example of the block diagram of the electronic device in this embodiment. 本実施形態における表示制御部内のブロック図の一例である。It is an example of the block diagram in the display control part in this embodiment. 本実施形態における表示形式の切替機能による切替制御の一例である。It is an example of the switching control by the switching function of the display format in this embodiment. 本実施形態における電子機器の使用している様子である。It is a mode that the electronic device in this embodiment is using. 本実施形態における被写体の特徴部分、被写体の特徴部分の変化量について説明する説明図である。It is explanatory drawing explaining the variation | change_quantity of the to-be-photographed object's characteristic part and the to-be-photographed object's characteristic part in this embodiment. 本実施形態における設定時の処理の流れを示すフローチャートの一例である。It is an example of the flowchart which shows the flow of the process at the time of the setting in this embodiment. 本実施形態における電子機器における表示形式の制御処理の流れを示すフローチャートの一例である。It is an example of the flowchart which shows the flow of a display format control process in the electronic device in this embodiment. 本実施形態における表示形式の制御処理を説明する一例である。It is an example explaining the display format control processing in the present embodiment. 本実施形態における表示形式の制御処理を説明する一例である。It is an example explaining the display format control processing in the present embodiment. 本実施形態における表示形式の制御処理を説明する一例である。It is an example explaining the display format control processing in the present embodiment. 本実施形態における表示形式の制御処理を説明する一例である。It is an example explaining the display format control processing in the present embodiment. 本実施形態における電子機器における表示形式の制御処理の他の例を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows the other example of the display format control process in the electronic device in this embodiment. 本実施形態における表示形式の制御処理を説明する一例である。It is an example explaining the display format control processing in the present embodiment. 本実施形態における表示形式の制御処理を説明する一例である。It is an example explaining the display format control processing in the present embodiment. 本実施形態における表示形式の制御処理を説明する一例である。It is an example explaining the display format control processing in the present embodiment. 本実施形態における表示形式の制御処理を説明する一例である。It is an example explaining the display format control processing in the present embodiment. 本発明の第2の実施形態による電子機器が備える表示制御部内のブロック図の一例である。It is an example of the block diagram in the display control part with which the electronic device by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention is provided. 本実施形態における電子機器における表示形式の制御処理の一例を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows an example of the display format control process in the electronic device in this embodiment. 本実施形態における電子機器における表示形式の制御処理の他の例を示すフローチャートである。It is a flowchart which shows the other example of the display format control process in the electronic device in this embodiment. 本実施形態における表示形式の制御処理を説明する一例である。It is an example explaining the display format control processing in the present embodiment. 本実施形態における表示形式の制御処理を説明する一例である。It is an example explaining the display format control processing in the present embodiment. 本実施形態における情報システムの概略構成図である。It is a schematic block diagram of the information system in this embodiment. 本実施形態における電子機器が備える表示制御部内のブロック図、及び、サーバが備える表示制御情報生成部内のブロック図等の一例である。It is an example of the block diagram in the display control part with which the electronic device in this embodiment is provided, the block diagram in the display control information generation part with which a server is provided, etc. 本実施形態における電子機器が備える表示制御部内のブロック図、及び、サーバが備える表示制御情報生成部内のブロック図等の別の例である。It is another examples, such as a block diagram in the display control part with which the electronic device in this embodiment is provided, and a block diagram in the display control information generation part with which a server is provided.
(第1の実施形態)
 以下、図面を参照しながら本発明の第1の実施形態について説明する。図1A及び図1Bは、本発明の第1の実施形態による電子機器3(例、携帯端末)の外観模式図である。なお、図1Aは電子機器3の筐体前面(表面、本体前面)、図1Bは電子機器3の筐体背面(裏面、本体背面)を表している。
(First embodiment)
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. 1A and 1B are schematic external views of an electronic apparatus 3 (eg, a portable terminal) according to the first embodiment of the present invention. 1A shows the front surface (front surface, front surface of the main body) of the electronic device 3, and FIG. 1B shows the rear surface (back surface, rear surface of the main body) of the electronic device 3.
 電子機器3は、図1Aに示すように、筐体前面に、タッチスクリーン(表示部)44、カーソルパッド48、フロントカメラ(レンズ、撮像部)62、スピーカ82、マイクロフォン84、決定/ホームボタン92を有する。また、電子機器3は、図1Bに示すように、筐体背面に、バックカメラ(レンズ、撮像部)64を有する。また、電子機器3は、図1A及び1Bに示すように、筐体上部(本体上部)に、電源ボタン90を有する。また、電子機器3は、破線にて示すように、内部に、モーションセンサ50(例、3軸加速度センサや3軸角速度センサ)、GPS52、方位計54、仰角センサ56を備える。 As shown in FIG. 1A, the electronic device 3 includes a touch screen (display unit) 44, a cursor pad 48, a front camera (lens, imaging unit) 62, a speaker 82, a microphone 84, and a determination / home button 92 on the front surface of the housing. Have In addition, as illustrated in FIG. 1B, the electronic device 3 includes a back camera (lens, imaging unit) 64 on the rear surface of the housing. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 1A and 1B, the electronic device 3 has a power button 90 on the upper part of the casing (upper part of the main body). The electronic device 3 includes a motion sensor 50 (for example, a triaxial acceleration sensor or a triaxial angular velocity sensor), a GPS 52, an azimuth meter 54, and an elevation angle sensor 56, as indicated by a broken line.
 タッチスクリーン44は、表示データに基づく表示画像を表示する。表示データとは、例えば、画像データ、テキストデータである。表示画像とは、画像(例えば、写真、イラストなどの画像)、テキスト(例えば、文字、記号)などである。また、タッチスクリーン44は、ユーザによる指示位置を示すカーソルを表示する。また、タッチスクリーン44は、タッチセンサを有し、ユーザによるタッチ位置を検出する。なお、タッチスクリーン44に表示される表示画像の表示形式(画面表示型)は、表示制御部100(後述)によって制御される(詳細は後述)。 Touch screen 44 displays a display image based on the display data. The display data is, for example, image data or text data. Display images are images (for example, images such as photographs and illustrations), text (for example, characters and symbols), and the like. In addition, the touch screen 44 displays a cursor indicating a position designated by the user. The touch screen 44 includes a touch sensor and detects a touch position by the user. The display format (screen display type) of the display image displayed on the touch screen 44 is controlled by the display control unit 100 (described later) (details are described later).
 カーソルパッド48は、タッチスクリーン44に表示されたカーソルの移動操作を受け付ける。即ち、タッチスクリーン44上に表示されたカーソルは、カーソルパッド48上におけるユーザの指の動きに応じて移動する。 The cursor pad 48 accepts a cursor movement operation displayed on the touch screen 44. That is, the cursor displayed on the touch screen 44 moves according to the movement of the user's finger on the cursor pad 48.
 フロントカメラ62は、カメラ部60(後述)の制御に従って、前方側(筐体前面側、タッチスクリーン44側)の被写体を撮像する。
 バックカメラ64は、カメラ部60(後述)の制御に従って、後方側(筐体背面側、タッチスクリーン44の逆側又は反対側)の被写体を撮像する。
 なお、フロントカメラ62(若しくは、フロントカメラ62及びカメラ部60)を第1撮像部とも称し、バックカメラ64(若しくは、バックカメラ64及びカメラ部60)を第2撮像部とも称する。また、フロントカメラ62及びバックカメラ64は、被写体を撮像する環境が暗所などの場合において被写体を撮像することが可能なように、赤外線カメラ或いは照明付きカメラであってもよい。
The front camera 62 images a subject on the front side (front side of the casing, touch screen 44 side) according to control of a camera unit 60 (described later).
The back camera 64 images a subject on the rear side (the rear side of the housing, the opposite side or the opposite side of the touch screen 44) according to control of a camera unit 60 (described later).
The front camera 62 (or the front camera 62 and the camera unit 60) is also referred to as a first imaging unit, and the back camera 64 (or the back camera 64 and the camera unit 60) is also referred to as a second imaging unit. Further, the front camera 62 and the back camera 64 may be an infrared camera or a camera with illumination so that the subject can be imaged in an environment where the subject is imaged in a dark place.
 スピーカ82は、オーディオ部80(後述)の制御に従って、音(声を含む)を出力する。マイクロフォン84は、集音した音データをオーディオ部80(後述)に供給する。
 電源ボタン90は、筐体(a casing body、a body、本体(a body, a main body))に電源を投入するためのボタンである。決定/ホームボタン92は、種々の決定、又は、ホーム画面(初期表示画面)の表示を指示するボタンである。
The speaker 82 outputs sound (including voice) according to control of the audio unit 80 (described later). The microphone 84 supplies the collected sound data to the audio unit 80 (described later).
The power button 90 is a button for turning on power to a casing (a casing body, a body, main body (a body, a main body)). The decision / home button 92 is a button for instructing various decisions or displaying a home screen (initial display screen).
 モーションセンサ50は、筐体の動き(例、筐体の傾斜など)を検出するために加速度センサ又は/及び角速度センサを備え、筐体に加わる加速度又は/及び角速度を検出する。GPS52は、筐体の位置を測定(測位)する。方位計54は、例えば、地磁気センサであって、方位(即ち、筐体の向く方向)を検出する。仰角センサ56は、筐体の動きを検出するために、筐体の仰角(例、光の入射方向と地表面とのなす角、或いは水平から上の視野角)を検出する。 The motion sensor 50 includes an acceleration sensor and / or an angular velocity sensor to detect movement of the casing (eg, inclination of the casing), and detects acceleration or / and angular velocity applied to the casing. The GPS 52 measures (positions) the position of the housing. The azimuth meter 54 is, for example, a geomagnetic sensor, and detects an azimuth (that is, a direction in which the housing faces). The elevation sensor 56 detects the elevation angle of the casing (for example, the angle between the incident direction of light and the ground surface, or the viewing angle from the horizontal) in order to detect the movement of the casing.
 図2は、電子機器3のブロック図の一例である。電子機器3は、図1A及び図1Bに示したものに加え、図2に示すように、プロセッサ10、インターフェイス部20、記憶部30、入出力部40、カメラ部60、通信部70、及び、オーディオ部80を備える。 FIG. 2 is an example of a block diagram of the electronic device 3. In addition to what is shown in FIGS. 1A and 1B, the electronic device 3 includes a processor 10, an interface unit 20, a storage unit 30, an input / output unit 40, a camera unit 60, a communication unit 70, and An audio unit 80 is provided.
 プロセッサ10は、電子機器3全体を制御する。例えば、プロセッサ10は、表示制御部100を有し、前方側を撮像した被写体の特徴部分(即ち、第1撮像部によって撮像された撮像画像上の特徴部分)の時間的な変化量(遷移量(a transition amount, a transition degree)、変化率(a change rate, a transition rate)、一期間における特徴部分の変化量)に基づいて、表示画像の表示形式を制御する。表示制御部100の詳細は後述する。 The processor 10 controls the entire electronic device 3. For example, the processor 10 includes the display control unit 100, and the temporal change amount (transition amount) of the feature portion of the subject imaged on the front side (that is, the feature portion on the captured image captured by the first imaging unit). The display format of the display image is controlled on the basis of (a transition amount, a transition degree), the change rate (a change rate, a transition 、 rate), and the amount of change of the characteristic portion in one period). Details of the display control unit 100 will be described later.
 インターフェイス部20は、プロセッサ10からの情報(例えば、制御情報、出力情報)を各部に供給する。また、インターフェイス部20は、各部からの情報(例えば、記憶情報、入力情報)をプロセッサ10に供給する。 The interface unit 20 supplies information (for example, control information and output information) from the processor 10 to each unit. Further, the interface unit 20 supplies information (for example, stored information and input information) from each unit to the processor 10.
 記憶部30は、種々の情報を記憶する。例えば、記憶部30は、プロセッサ10において処理されるプログラム、種々の設定情報を記憶する。また、記憶部30は、タッチスクリーン44に表示する表示データを記憶する。 The storage unit 30 stores various information. For example, the storage unit 30 stores a program processed in the processor 10 and various setting information. In addition, the storage unit 30 stores display data to be displayed on the touch screen 44.
 入出力部40は、タッチスクリーンコントローラ42、カーソルパッドコントローラ46などを含む。タッチスクリーンコントローラ42は、プロセッサ10(表示制御部100)から出力される制御情報に基づいて、タッチスクリーン44の表示を制御する。カーソルパッドコントローラ46は、カーソルパッド48を介して受け付けたカーソルの移動操作をプロセッサ10に供給する。 The input / output unit 40 includes a touch screen controller 42, a cursor pad controller 46, and the like. The touch screen controller 42 controls display on the touch screen 44 based on control information output from the processor 10 (display control unit 100). The cursor pad controller 46 supplies the movement operation of the cursor received via the cursor pad 48 to the processor 10.
 カメラ部60は、フロントカメラ62及びバックカメラ64を制御し、被写体を撮像する。カメラ部60は、撮像画像をプロセッサ10に供給する。なお、カメラ部60は、プロセッサ10の制御に従って、被写体を撮像してもよい。 The camera unit 60 controls the front camera 62 and the back camera 64 to image the subject. The camera unit 60 supplies the captured image to the processor 10. Note that the camera unit 60 may image the subject in accordance with the control of the processor 10.
 通信部70は、プロセッサ10の制御に従って、外部(例えば、他の電子機器、サーバ、ストレージ)と通信する。オーディオ部80は、プロセッサ10の制御に従って、スピーカ82及びマイクロフォン84を制御する。 The communication unit 70 communicates with the outside (for example, other electronic devices, servers, storages) under the control of the processor 10. The audio unit 80 controls the speaker 82 and the microphone 84 according to the control of the processor 10.
 図3は、表示制御部100内のブロック図の一例である。図4は、表示形式の切替機能による切替制御の一例である。図5は、電子機器3の使用している様子である。図6は、被写体の特徴部分、被写体の特徴部分の変化量について説明する説明図である。 FIG. 3 is an example of a block diagram in the display control unit 100. FIG. 4 is an example of switching control by a display format switching function. FIG. 5 shows a state where the electronic device 3 is used. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the feature portion of the subject and the amount of change in the subject feature portion.
 表示制御部100は、図3に示すように、設定認識部110、傾斜量判定部120、特徴領域抽出部130、変化量算出部140、切替判定部150、切替制限部(ホールド部)160、切替処理部180、及び、設定部190を備える。 As shown in FIG. 3, the display control unit 100 includes a setting recognition unit 110, an inclination amount determination unit 120, a feature region extraction unit 130, a change amount calculation unit 140, a switching determination unit 150, a switching restriction unit (hold unit) 160, A switching processing unit 180 and a setting unit 190 are provided.
 設定部190は、種々の情報を設定する。例えば、表示画像の表示形式の切替機能のオン(有効)/オフ(無効)を設定する。また、設定部190は、表示画像の表示形式の制御機能の1つであるホールド機能(ホールド手段)のオン/オフを設定する。なお、ホールド機能のオン/オフは、表示画像の表示形式の切替機能がオンの場合に参照される。換言すれば、ホールド機能は、表示画像の表示形式の切替機能のサブ機能である。また、設定部190による設定内容は、記憶部30に記憶される。 The setting unit 190 sets various information. For example, ON (valid) / OFF (invalid) of the display image display format switching function is set. The setting unit 190 also sets on / off of a hold function (hold means) that is one of the display image display format control functions. The on / off of the hold function is referred to when the display image display format switching function is on. In other words, the hold function is a subfunction of the display image display format switching function. Further, the setting content by the setting unit 190 is stored in the storage unit 30.
 設定部190は、環境に応じて自動的に、又は、ユーザの指示に従って、表示形式の切替機能のオン/オフ、及び、ホールド機能のオン/オフを設定する。自動設定によってオン/オフを設定する場合、設定部190は、例えば、切替可能な表示形式の表示画像を表示するアプリケーションが実行され、かつ、節電モードに設定されていない場合、ホールド機能をオンに設定する。なお、切替可能な表示形式の表示画像を表示するアプリケーションとは、表示形式が、以下(図4参照)に示すように切り替わる表示画像を表示するアプリケーションである。 The setting unit 190 sets the display format switching function on / off and the hold function on / off automatically or according to a user instruction according to the environment. When setting on / off by automatic setting, the setting unit 190 turns on the hold function when, for example, an application that displays a display image in a switchable display format is executed and the power saving mode is not set. Set. Note that an application that displays a display image in a switchable display format is an application that displays a display image whose display format is switched as shown below (see FIG. 4).
 以下、表示形式の切替機能による切替制御について説明する。図4(a)~(d)の夫々は、図5(a)に示すように、ユーザが筐体を回転させて、タッチスクリーン44が縦向き状態(後述)から横向き状態(後述)に変化した場合、又は、横向き状態から縦向き状態に変化した場合における、表示画像の切替制御の一例である。
 図4(a)及び(b)は、タッチスクリーン44の向きの変化に従って表示画像を回転させる切替制御を表している。例えば、図4(a)及び(b)は、表示画像の表示形式が縦長画像(後述)から横長画像(後述)、又は、横長画像から縦長画像へと切り替わる切替制御の一例を表している。また、図4(c)及び図4(d)は、タッチスクリーン44の向きの変化に従って表示画像を縮小させる切替制御、即ち、表示画像の表示形式が縦長画像から横長画像、又は、横長画像から縦長画像へと切り替わらない切替制御の一例を表している。
Hereinafter, switching control by the display format switching function will be described. 4 (a) to 4 (d), as shown in FIG. 5 (a), the user rotates the casing, and the touch screen 44 changes from a vertically oriented state (described later) to a horizontally oriented state (described later). This is an example of display image switching control in a case where the display image is changed or when the horizontal state is changed to the vertical state.
4A and 4B show switching control for rotating the display image according to the change in the orientation of the touch screen 44. FIG. For example, FIGS. 4A and 4B show an example of switching control in which the display format of the display image is switched from a portrait image (described later) to a landscape image (described later), or from a landscape image to a portrait image. 4C and 4D show switching control for reducing the display image according to the change in the orientation of the touch screen 44, that is, the display format of the display image is from a vertically long image to a horizontally long image, or from a horizontally long image. An example of switching control that does not switch to a portrait image is shown.
(図4(a)の一例)
 図4(a)の矢印の左側の図は、天地方向を長手方向としている状態(以下、縦向き状態)のタッチスクリーン44に、天地方向が長手方向である画像(以下、縦長画像)である表示画像HGが、表示されている様子を表している。表示画像HGは、テキストTと写真Pとを含んでいる。写真Pは、縦長である。
(Example of FIG. 4A)
The figure on the left side of the arrow in FIG. 4A is an image (hereinafter referred to as a vertically long image) in which the top and bottom direction is the longitudinal direction on the touch screen 44 in a state where the vertical direction is the longitudinal direction (hereinafter referred to as a vertically oriented state). display image HG 1 is represents a state that is displayed. The display image HG 1 includes text T 1 and a photograph P 1 . Photos P 1 is a portrait.
 図4(a)の矢印の右側の図は、水平方向を長手方向としている状態(以下、横向き状態)のタッチスクリーン44に、水平方向が長手方向である画像(以下、横長画像)である表示画像HG’が、表示されている様子を表している。表示画像HG’は、テキストT’と写真Pとを含んでいる。写真Pは、縦長である。 The right side of the arrow in FIG. 4A is a display on the touch screen 44 in which the horizontal direction is the longitudinal direction (hereinafter referred to as landscape orientation), which is an image in which the horizontal direction is the longitudinal direction (hereinafter landscape orientation). The image HG 1 ′ is displayed. The display image HG 1 ′ includes text T 1 ′ and a photograph P 1 . Photos P 1 is a portrait.
 例えば、ユーザが、図5(a)の如く筐体を回転させて、タッチスクリーン44が縦向き状態から横向き状態に変化した場合(右向矢印)、表示画像の表示形式は、タッチスクリーン44の向きの変化に従って、縦長画像である表示画像HGから、横長画像である表示画像HG’へと切り替わる。逆に、タッチスクリーン44が横向き状態から縦向き状態に変化した場合(左向矢印)、表示画像の表示形式は、横長画像である表示画像HG’から、縦長画像である表示画像HGへと切り替わる。
 なお、表示画像HG’上の写真Pは、表示画像HG上の写真Pと表示サイズ及び表示方向が同一である。表示画像HG’上のテキストT’は、横長である表示画像HG’に合わせるように、表示画像HG上のテキストTを再配置したものである。
For example, when the user rotates the casing as shown in FIG. 5A and the touch screen 44 changes from the vertical orientation to the horizontal orientation (right arrow), the display format of the display image is In accordance with the change in orientation, the display image HG 1 that is a portrait image is switched to the display image HG 1 ′ that is a landscape image. Conversely, when the touch screen 44 is changed vertically state from landscape state (left direction arrow), the display format of the display image, the display image HG 1 'is oblong image, the display image HG 1 is a vertically long image And switch.
The photo P 1 on the display image HG 1 ′ has the same display size and display direction as the photo P 1 on the display image HG 1 . 'Text T 1 of the' on display image HG 1 is to match the a landscape display image HG 1 ', is obtained by rearranging the text T 1 of the on the display image HG 1.
(図4(b)の一例)
 図4(b)の矢印の左側の図は、横向き状態のタッチスクリーン44に、横長画像である表示画像HGが、表示されている様子を表している。表示画像HGは、テキストTと写真Pとを含んでいる。写真Pは、横長である。
(Example of FIG. 4B)
The left side of FIG arrow in FIG. 4 (b), the touch screen 44 of the horizontally oriented state, the display image HG 2 is a horizontally long image, and represents a state that is displayed. Display image HG 2 is, and a text T 2 and the photograph P 2. Photos P 2 is a landscape.
 図4(b)の矢印の右側の図は、縦横向き状態のタッチスクリーン44に、縦長画像である表示画像HG’が、表示されている様子を表している。表示画像HG’は、テキストT’と写真Pとを含んでいる。写真Pは、横長である。 The diagram on the right side of the arrow in FIG. 4B shows that the display image HG 2 ′, which is a portrait image, is displayed on the touch screen 44 in the portrait and landscape orientation. The display image HG 2 ′ includes text T 2 ′ and a photograph P 2 . Photos P 2 is a landscape.
 例えば、ユーザが、図5(a)の如く筐体を回転させて、タッチスクリーン44が横向き状態から縦向き状態に変化した場合(右向矢印)、表示画像の表示形式は、タッチスクリーン44の向きの変化に従って、横長画像である表示画像HGから、縦長画像である表示画像HG’へと切り替わる。逆に、タッチスクリーン44が縦向き状態から横向き状態に変化した場合(左向矢印)、表示画像の表示形式は、縦長画像である表示画像HG’から、横長画像である表示画像HGへと切り替わる。
 なお、表示画像HG’上の写真Pは、表示画像HG上の写真Pと表示サイズ及び表示方向が同一である。表示画像HG’上のテキストT’は、縦長である表示画像HG’に合わせるように、表示画像HG上のテキストTを再配置したものである。
For example, when the user rotates the casing as shown in FIG. 5A and the touch screen 44 changes from the landscape orientation to the portrait orientation (right arrow), the display format of the display image is that of the touch screen 44. In accordance with the change in orientation, the display image HG 2 that is a horizontally long image is switched to the display image HG 2 ′ that is a vertically long image. Conversely, when the touch screen 44 is changed from the vertical state to the horizontal state (left direction arrow), the display format of the display image, the display image HG 2 'is a portrait image, the display image HG 2 is a horizontally long image And switch.
Incidentally, photographs P 2 on the display image HG 2 'are identical in photograph P 2 and the display size and the display direction of the display image HG 2. 'Text T 2 of the' on display image HG 2, as fit in a vertically long display image HG 2 ', is obtained by rearranging the text T 2 of the on the display image HG 2.
(図4(c)の一例)
 図4(c)の矢印の左側の図は、図4(a)の矢印の左側の図と同様、表示画像HGが、表示されている様子を表している。
(Example of FIG. 4C)
The left side of FIG arrow in FIG. 4 (c), similar to the left side of FIG arrow in FIG. 4 (a), the display image HG 1, represents a state that is displayed.
 図4(c)の矢印の右側の図は、横向き状態のタッチスクリーン44に、縦長画像である表示画像HG’’が、表示されている様子を表している。表示画像HG’’は、テキストT’’と写真P’’を含んでいる。写真P’’は、縦長である。 The diagram on the right side of the arrow in FIG. 4C shows a state in which the display image HG 1 ″, which is a portrait image, is displayed on the touch screen 44 in the landscape orientation. The display image HG 1 ″ includes text T 1 ″ and a photograph P 1 ″. The photograph P 1 ″ is vertically long.
 例えば、ユーザが、図5(a)の如く筐体を回転させて、タッチスクリーン44が縦向き状態から横向き状態に変化した場合(右向矢印)、表示画像の表示形式は、タッチスクリーン44の天地方向の長さの変化(短くなる)に従って、縦長画像である表示画像HGから、縮小された縦長画像である表示画像HG’’へと切り替わる。逆に、タッチスクリーン44が横向き状態から縦向き状態に変化した場合(左向矢印)、表示画像の表示形式は、タッチスクリーン44の天地方向の長さの変化(長くなる)に従って、縮小された縦長画像である表示画像HG’’から、元の大きさの縦長画像である表示画像HGへと切り替わる。
 なお、表示画像HG’’上の写真P’’は、縮小された表示画像HG’’に合わせるように、表示画像HG上の写真Pを縮小したものである。表示画像HG’’上のテキストT’’についても同様である。
For example, when the user rotates the casing as shown in FIG. 5A and the touch screen 44 changes from the vertical orientation to the horizontal orientation (right arrow), the display format of the display image is according circumferential direction of the length change of the (shortened), switched from the display image HG 1 is a vertically long image, and to reduced portrait image at a display image HG 1 ''. Conversely, when the touch screen 44 changes from the horizontal state to the vertical state (left arrow), the display format of the display image is reduced in accordance with the change in the vertical direction of the touch screen 44 (which becomes longer). The display image HG 1 ″ which is a vertically long image is switched to the display image HG 1 which is a vertically long image of the original size.
Note that the photo P 1 ″ on the display image HG 1 ″ is obtained by reducing the photo P 1 on the display image HG 1 so as to match the reduced display image HG 1 ″. The same applies to the text T 1 ″ on the display image HG 1 ″.
(図4(d)の一例)
 図4(d)の矢印の左側の図は、図4(b)の矢印の左側の図と同様、表示画像HGが、表示されている様子を表している。
(Example of FIG. 4D)
The left side of FIG arrow in FIG. 4 (d), similarly to the left side of FIG arrow in FIG. 4 (b), the display image HG 2, represents a state that is displayed.
 図4(d)の矢印の右側の図は、縦向き状態のタッチスクリーン44に、横長画像である表示画像HG’’が、表示されている様子を表している。表示画像HG’’は、テキストT’’と写真P’’を含んでいる。写真P’’は、横長である。 The diagram on the right side of the arrow in FIG. 4D shows a state in which the display image HG 2 ″, which is a landscape image, is displayed on the touch screen 44 in the portrait orientation. The display image HG 2 ″ includes text T 2 ″ and a photograph P 2 ″. The photograph P 2 ″ is horizontally long.
 例えば、ユーザが、図5(a)の如く筐体を回転させて、タッチスクリーン44が横向き状態から縦向き状態に変化した場合(左向矢印)、表示画像の表示形式は、タッチスクリーン44の水平方向の長さの変化(短くなる)に従って、横長画像である表示画像HGから、縮小された横長画像である表示画像HG’’へと切り替わる。逆に、タッチスクリーン44が縦向き状態から横向き状態に変化した場合(右向矢印)、表示画像の表示形式は、タッチスクリーン44の水平方向の長さの変化(長くなる)に従って、縮小された横長画像である表示画像HG’’から、元の大きさの横長画像である表示画像HGへと切り替わる。
 なお、表示画像HG’’上の写真P’’は、縮小された表示画像HG’’に合わせるように、表示画像HG上の写真Pを縮小したものである。表示画像HG’’上のテキストT’’についても同様である。
For example, when the user rotates the casing as shown in FIG. 5A and the touch screen 44 changes from the landscape orientation to the portrait orientation (left arrow), the display format of the display image is that of the touch screen 44. In accordance with the change (shortening) of the length in the horizontal direction, the display image HG 2 that is a horizontally long image is switched to the display image HG 2 ″ that is a reduced horizontally long image. Conversely, when the touch screen 44 changes from the vertical orientation to the horizontal orientation (right arrow), the display format of the display image is reduced in accordance with the change in the horizontal length of the touch screen 44 (which becomes longer). The display image HG 2 ″ which is a horizontally long image is switched to the display image HG 2 which is a horizontally long image of the original size.
Note that the photograph P 2 ″ on the display image HG 2 ″ is obtained by reducing the photograph P 2 on the display image HG 2 so as to match the reduced display image HG 2 ″. The same applies to the text T 2 ″ on the display image HG 2 ″.
 設定認識部110は、記憶部30に記憶されている設定情報(表示画像の表示形式の切替機能のオン/オフの情報、ホールド機能のオン/オフの情報)を取得する。例えば、設定認識部110は、傾斜量判定部120からの要求に応じて、記憶部30に記憶されている設定情報を取得し、設定情報を傾斜量判定部120に出力(応答)する。 The setting recognizing unit 110 acquires setting information stored in the storage unit 30 (display image display format switching function on / off information, hold function on / off information). For example, the setting recognition unit 110 acquires the setting information stored in the storage unit 30 in response to a request from the inclination amount determination unit 120 and outputs (responds) the setting information to the inclination amount determination unit 120.
 傾斜量判定部120は、モーションセンサ50(仰角センサ56)から検出値を取得し、筐体の傾斜量を算出する。なお、傾斜量判定部120は、表示形式の切替機能がオンに設定されている場合に、筐体の傾斜量を算出してもよい。 The tilt amount determination unit 120 acquires a detection value from the motion sensor 50 (elevation angle sensor 56), and calculates the tilt amount of the housing. Note that the tilt amount determination unit 120 may calculate the tilt amount of the housing when the display format switching function is set to ON.
 筐体の傾斜量を算出した傾斜量判定部120は、算出した傾斜量が所定量以上であるか否か、即ち、筐体が所定量以上傾斜したか否かを判定する。上記所定量は、例えば、45度や60度である。上記所定量は、例えば、5、10、15、20、25、30、35、40、45、50、60、65、70、75、80、85、又は90度にできる。 The inclination amount determination unit 120 that calculates the inclination amount of the housing determines whether the calculated inclination amount is equal to or larger than a predetermined amount, that is, whether the housing is inclined more than the predetermined amount. The predetermined amount is, for example, 45 degrees or 60 degrees. The predetermined amount can be, for example, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, or 90 degrees.
 傾斜量判定部120は、表示形式の切替機能がオフに設定されている場合、何もしない。即ち、傾斜量判定部120は、表示形式の切替機能がオフに設定されている場合には、表示形式の切り替えは行わないため、既に筐体の傾斜量を算出していた場合であっても、何もしない。 The tilt amount determination unit 120 does nothing when the display format switching function is set to OFF. In other words, the tilt amount determination unit 120 does not switch the display format when the display format switching function is set to OFF, so even if the tilt amount of the housing has already been calculated. ,do nothing.
 また、傾斜量判定部120は、筐体が所定量以上傾斜していないと判定した場合には、表示形式の切り替えは行わないため、表示形式の切替機能がオンに設定されている場合であっても、何もしない。 In addition, when the tilt amount determination unit 120 determines that the casing is not tilted by a predetermined amount or more, the display format switching is not performed, and thus the display format switching function is set to ON. But do nothing.
 傾斜量判定部120は、表示形式の切替機能がオンに設定され、かつ、筐体が所定量以上傾斜したと判定した場合において、本実施形態のホールド機能がオフに設定されている場合には、筐体の傾斜量、及び、筐体の傾斜方向とともに、ホールド機能がオフに設定されている旨の通知(情報)を切替判定部150に出力する。 In the case where the display amount switching function is set to ON and the inclination amount determination unit 120 determines that the housing is inclined by a predetermined amount or more, and the hold function of this embodiment is set to OFF. A notification (information) indicating that the hold function is set to OFF is output to the switching determination unit 150 together with the tilt amount of the housing and the tilt direction of the housing.
 傾斜量判定部120は、表示形式の切替機能がオンに設定され、かつ、筐体が所定量以上傾斜したと判定した場合において、本実施形態のホールド機能がオンに設定されている場合には、筐体の傾斜量、及び、筐体の傾斜方向を特徴領域抽出部130に出力する。 In the case where the display amount switching function is set to ON and it is determined that the housing is inclined by a predetermined amount or more, the inclination amount determination unit 120 is set to ON when the hold function of the present embodiment is set to ON. , The tilt amount of the casing and the tilt direction of the casing are output to the feature region extraction unit 130.
 特徴領域抽出部130は、フロントカメラ62によって撮像された撮像画像をカメラ部60から取得する。例えば、特徴領域抽出部130は、筐体の傾斜量、及び、筐体の傾斜方向を傾斜量判定部120から取得した場合に、筐体の傾斜前後の撮像画像をカメラ部60から取得する。つまり、特徴領域抽出部130は、表示形式の切替機能、及び、ホールド機能がオンに設定され、かつ、筐体が所定量以上傾斜したと判定された場合に、筐体の傾斜前後の撮像画像をカメラ部60から取得する。 The feature region extraction unit 130 acquires a captured image captured by the front camera 62 from the camera unit 60. For example, the feature region extraction unit 130 acquires captured images before and after the tilt of the casing from the camera unit 60 when the tilt amount of the casing and the tilt direction of the casing are acquired from the tilt amount determination unit 120. That is, the feature region extraction unit 130, when the display format switching function and the hold function are set to ON, and when it is determined that the casing is tilted by a predetermined amount or more, the captured images before and after the tilt of the casing Is acquired from the camera unit 60.
 傾斜前後の撮像画像とは、筐体の傾斜前の撮像画像(傾斜動作し始める直前の撮像画像、若しくは、傾斜動作し始めた直後の撮像画像)、及び、筐体の傾斜後の撮像画像(傾斜動作が完了した直後の撮像画像)である。 The captured images before and after the tilt are a captured image before tilting the casing (a captured image immediately before starting the tilting operation or a captured image immediately after starting the tilting operation), and a captured image after tilting the casing ( (Taken image immediately after the tilting operation is completed).
 なお、傾斜前後の撮像画像のうち、筐体の傾斜前の撮像画像は、特徴領域抽出部130が、傾斜量判定部120から、筐体の傾斜量、及び、筐体の傾斜方向を取得する時点よりも前(過去)の画像である。従って、特徴領域抽出部130は、傾斜量判定部120から筐体の傾斜量等を取得した時点でカメラ部60に撮像を要求するという方法では、筐体の傾斜前の撮像画像を取得することは難しい。そのため、例えば、下記方法によって、特徴領域抽出部130は、筐体の傾斜前の撮像画像を取得する。 Note that, among the captured images before and after the tilt, for the captured images before the tilt of the casing, the feature region extraction unit 130 acquires the tilt amount of the casing and the tilt direction of the casing from the tilt amount determination unit 120. It is an image before (past) before the time. Therefore, in the method of requesting the camera unit 60 to capture the image when the amount of inclination of the housing is acquired from the amount of inclination determination unit 120, the feature region extraction unit 130 acquires a captured image before the inclination of the housing. Is difficult. Therefore, for example, the feature region extraction unit 130 acquires a captured image before the casing is tilted by the following method.
 第1の方法は、カメラ部60が、表示形式の切替機能、及び、ホールド機能がオンに設定されている場合には、常に、画像を撮像し、一定時間(所定時間)、一時的に記憶しておく方法である。第2の方法は、カメラ部60が、モーションセンサ50(仰角センサ56)からの通知によって、筐体が傾斜動作し始めたとき(筐体の動きを検出したとき)から画像を撮像し、一定時間(所定時間)、一時的に記憶しておく方法である。第1の方法及び第2の方法の何れであっても、特徴領域抽出部130は、筐体の傾斜量、及び、筐体の傾斜方向を傾斜量判定部120から取得した時点において、一時的に記憶されている画像の中から傾斜前の撮像画像を取得することができる。 In the first method, when the display unit switching function and the hold function are set to ON, the camera unit 60 always captures an image and temporarily stores it for a predetermined time (predetermined time). It is a method to keep. According to the second method, the camera unit 60 captures an image from the time when the housing starts to tilt by the notification from the motion sensor 50 (elevation angle sensor 56) (when the motion of the housing is detected), and is constant. This is a method of temporarily storing time (predetermined time). In any of the first method and the second method, the feature region extraction unit 130 temporarily receives the tilt amount of the casing and the tilt direction of the casing from the tilt amount determination unit 120. The pre-tilt captured image can be acquired from the images stored in the.
 特徴領域抽出部130は、筐体の傾斜前後の撮像画像(筐体の傾斜前の撮像画像、筐体の傾斜後の撮像画像)をカメラ部60から取得した場合、筐体の傾斜前後の夫々の撮像画像から、被写体の特徴部分を抽出する。この場合、想定する被写体は、電子機器3を把持し、タッチスクリーン44を見ているユーザ(自分)である。特徴部分は、例えば、ユーザの顔のパーツ(例えば、目、耳)又は顔の輪郭である。 When the captured image before and after the tilt of the casing (the captured image before the tilt of the casing and the captured image after the tilt of the casing) is acquired from the camera unit 60, the feature region extraction unit 130 before and after the tilt of the casing, respectively. The characteristic part of the subject is extracted from the captured image. In this case, the assumed subject is a user (self) who holds the electronic device 3 and is looking at the touch screen 44. The characteristic portion is, for example, a part of the user's face (for example, eyes, ears) or a face outline.
 例えば、筐体の傾斜前の撮像画像が図6(a)に示す撮像画像SG、筐体の傾斜後の撮像画像が図6(a)に示す撮像画像SG’である場合、特徴領域抽出部130は、図6(b)に示すように、撮像画像SG及び撮像画像SG’の夫々から、ユーザの両目を通過する直線L、L’を被写体の特徴部分として抽出する。
 また、特徴領域抽出部130は、ユーザの両目を通過する直線L、L’に代えて、図6(c)に示すように、ユーザの両耳を通過する直線L2、’を被写体の特徴部分として抽出してもよい。
 また、特徴領域抽出部130は、上記に代えて、図6(d)に示すように、ユーザの顔の輪郭に隣接する矩形の中心を通過する直線L(又は直線L)、直線L’(又は直線L’)を被写体の特徴部分として抽出してもよい。
For example, when the captured image before tilting the housing is the captured image SG illustrated in FIG. 6A and the captured image after tilting the housing is the captured image SG ′ illustrated in FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 6B, 130 extracts straight lines L 1 and L 1 ′ that pass through both eyes of the user from the captured image SG and the captured image SG ′ as characteristic portions of the subject.
Further, the feature region extraction unit 130, instead of the straight lines L 1 and L 1 ′ passing through both eyes of the user, as shown in FIG. 6C, straight lines L 2 and L 2 ′ passing through both ears of the user. May be extracted as a characteristic part of the subject.
Further, instead of the above, the feature region extraction unit 130, as shown in FIG. 6 (d), the straight line L 3 (or straight line L 4 ), straight line L passing through the center of the rectangle adjacent to the contour of the user's face. 3 ′ (or straight line L 4 ′) may be extracted as a characteristic portion of the subject.
 特徴領域抽出部130は、筐体の傾斜前後の夫々の撮像画像から被写体の特徴部分を抽出できた場合には、傾斜量判定部120から取得した筐体の傾斜量、及び、筐体の傾斜方向とともに、傾斜前後の夫々の撮像画像から抽出した被写体の特徴部分を示す情報を変化量算出部140に出力する。例えば、特徴領域抽出部130は、図6(b)に示す直線L、L’を被写体の特徴部分として抽出できた場合には、被写体の特徴部分を示す情報として、直線Lの傾きの値、及び、直線L’の傾きの値を変化量算出部140に出力する。 When the feature region extraction unit 130 can extract the feature portion of the subject from the respective captured images before and after the tilt of the casing, the tilt amount of the casing acquired from the tilt amount determination unit 120 and the tilt of the casing Along with the direction, information indicating the characteristic part of the subject extracted from the respective captured images before and after the tilt is output to the change amount calculation unit 140. For example, when the feature region extraction unit 130 can extract the straight lines L 1 and L 1 ′ shown in FIG. 6B as the feature portions of the subject, the feature region extraction unit 130 uses the slope of the straight line L 1 as information indicating the subject feature portion. And the slope value of the straight line L 1 ′ are output to the variation calculation unit 140.
 一方、特徴領域抽出部130は、筐体の傾斜前の撮像画像、筐体の傾斜後の撮像画像の少なくとも一方から被写体の特徴部分を抽出できなかった場合には、傾斜量判定部120から取得した筐体の傾斜量、及び、筐体の傾斜方向とともに、特徴部分を抽出できなかった旨の通知(情報)を切替判定部150に出力する。 On the other hand, the feature region extraction unit 130 acquires from the tilt amount determination unit 120 when the feature portion of the subject cannot be extracted from at least one of the captured image before tilting the housing and the captured image after tilting the housing. A notification (information) indicating that the feature portion could not be extracted is output to the switching determination unit 150 together with the amount of inclination of the casing and the inclination direction of the casing.
 なお、図1Aに示すように、タッチスクリーン44とフロントカメラ62の位置関係から、ユーザが、電子機器3を把持し、タッチスクリーン44を見ている場合には、筐体の傾斜前後の夫々の撮像画像から、当該ユーザの顔のパーツ又は輪郭を抽出できる公算が大きい。 As shown in FIG. 1A, from the positional relationship between the touch screen 44 and the front camera 62, when the user is holding the electronic device 3 and looking at the touch screen 44, each of the cases before and after the inclination of the housing is determined. It is highly probable that a facial part or contour of the user can be extracted from the captured image.
 変化量算出部140は、筐体の傾斜量、筐体の傾斜方向、及び、夫々の撮像画像(筐体の傾斜前の撮像画像、及び、筐体の傾斜後の撮像画像)から抽出した被写体の特徴部分を示す情報を特徴領域抽出部130から取得した場合には、当該特徴部分の時間的な変化量を算出する。 The change amount calculation unit 140 is a subject extracted from the amount of inclination of the housing, the direction of inclination of the housing, and each captured image (the captured image before the housing is tilted and the captured image after the housing is tilted). When the information indicating the feature portion is acquired from the feature region extraction unit 130, the temporal change amount of the feature portion is calculated.
 例えば、変化量算出部140は、被写体の特徴部分を示す情報として、図6(b)に示す直線Lの傾きの値、及び、直線L’の傾きの値を取得した場合には、特徴部分の時間的な変化量として、直線Lと直線L’の為す角度θ(図6(b)参照)を算出する。なお、変化量算出部140は、被写体の特徴部分を示す情報として、図6(c)に示す直線Lの傾きの値、及び、直線L’の傾きの値を取得した場合には、特徴部分の時間的な変化量として角度θ(図6(c)参照)を算出し、図6(d)に示す直線Lの傾きの値、及び、直線L’の傾きの値を取得した場合には、特徴部分の時間的な変化量として角度θ(図6(d)参照)を算出する。なお、上述の角度θ、θ、θは、筐体の傾斜前後における被写体の特徴部分の回転量でもある。なお、例えば、変化量算出部140は、被写体の特徴部分を示す情報として図6(b)に示す撮像画像における直線Lの位置(座標)を取得した場合には、特徴部分の時間的な変化量として撮像画像における直線Lの位置の移動量を算出する。また、例えば、変化量算出部140は、被写体の特徴部分を示す情報としてモーションセンサ50によって検出した筐体の重力方向に対する直線L’の傾きの値を取得した場合には、特徴部分の時間的な変化量として重力方向に対する直線L’の傾き(角度)を算出する。 For example, the change amount calculator 140, as information indicating a characteristic portion of the object, the slope of the value of the straight line L 1 shown in FIG. 6 (b), and, when obtaining the value of the slope of the straight line L 1 'is An angle θ 1 (see FIG. 6B) formed by the straight line L 1 and the straight line L 1 ′ is calculated as a temporal change amount of the characteristic portion. The change amount calculation unit 140, as information indicating a characteristic portion of the object, the slope of the value of the straight line L 2 shown in FIG. 6 (c), and, when obtaining the value of the slope of the straight line L 2 'is calculates the angle theta 2 (see FIG. 6 (c)) as a temporal change amount of the characteristic portion, the slope of the values of the straight line L 3 shown in FIG. 6 (d), and the value of the gradient of the straight line L 3 ' If acquired, the angle θ 3 (see FIG. 6D) is calculated as the temporal change amount of the feature portion. The angles θ 1 , θ 2 , and θ 3 described above are also the amount of rotation of the characteristic portion of the subject before and after the inclination of the housing. Incidentally, for example, the change amount calculation unit 140, when acquiring the position of the straight line L 1 (coordinates) in the captured image shown in FIG. 6 (b) as the information indicating the characteristic portion of the object, a temporal characteristic parts It calculates a movement amount of the position of the straight line L 1 in the captured image as the variation amount. For example, when the change amount calculation unit 140 acquires the value of the slope of the straight line L 1 ′ with respect to the gravitational direction of the casing detected by the motion sensor 50 as information indicating the characteristic part of the subject, the time of the characteristic part is obtained. The inclination (angle) of the straight line L 1 ′ with respect to the direction of gravity is calculated as a general change amount.
 被写体の特徴部分の時間的な変化量を算出した変化量算出部140は、特徴領域抽出部130から取得した筐体の傾斜量、及び、筐体の傾斜方向とともに、被写体の特徴部分の時間的な変化量を切替判定部150に出力する。 The change amount calculation unit 140 that calculates the temporal change amount of the feature portion of the subject includes the amount of inclination of the casing acquired from the feature region extraction unit 130 and the inclination direction of the casing, and the temporal change amount of the feature portion of the subject. The change amount is output to the switching determination unit 150.
 切替判定部150は、表示画像の表示形式の切り替えの要否を判定する。
 切替判定部150は、筐体の傾斜量、筐体の傾斜方向、及び、本実施形態のホールド機能がオフに設定されている旨の通知(情報)を傾斜量判定部120から取得した場合、表示形式の切り替えが必要であると判定する。
 つまり、筐体が所定量以上傾斜したと判定された場合であって、本実施形態のホールド機能がオフに設定されている場合には、切替判定部150は、表示形式の切り替えが必要であると判定する。
The switching determination unit 150 determines whether it is necessary to switch the display format of the display image.
When the switching determination unit 150 obtains a notification (information) from the inclination amount determination unit 120 that the amount of inclination of the housing, the inclination direction of the housing, and the hold function of the present embodiment are set to off, It is determined that the display format needs to be switched.
In other words, when it is determined that the housing is inclined by a predetermined amount or more and the hold function of the present embodiment is set to OFF, the switching determination unit 150 needs to switch the display format. Is determined.
 また、切替判定部150は、筐体の傾斜量、筐体の傾斜方向、及び、特徴部分を抽出できなかった旨の通知(情報)を特徴領域抽出部130から取得した場合にも、表示形式の切り替えが必要であると判定する。
 つまり、筐体が所定量以上傾斜したと判定された場合であって、ホールド機能がオンに設定されている場合において、筐体の傾斜前の撮像画像、筐体の傾斜後の撮像画像の少なくとも一方から被写体の特徴部分が抽出されなかった場合(換言すれば、被写体の特徴部分の時間的な変化量を算出することができない場合)には、切替判定部150は、表示形式の切り替えが必要であると判定する。
The switching determination unit 150 also displays the display format even when the amount of tilt of the housing, the tilt direction of the housing, and a notification (information) that the feature portion could not be extracted from the feature region extraction unit 130. It is determined that switching is required.
That is, when it is determined that the casing is tilted by a predetermined amount or more and the hold function is set to ON, at least the captured image before tilting the casing and the captured image after tilting the casing are at least When the feature portion of the subject is not extracted from one side (in other words, when the temporal change amount of the feature portion of the subject cannot be calculated), the switching determination unit 150 needs to switch the display format. It is determined that
 また、切替判定部150は、筐体の傾斜量、筐体の傾斜方向、及び、被写体の特徴部分の時間的な変化量を変化量算出部140から取得した場合には、被写体の特徴部分の時間的な変化量と変化量に関する第1の閾値とを比較し、表示画像の表示形式の切り替えの要否を判定する。 In addition, when the change determination unit 150 acquires the amount of inclination of the housing, the direction of inclination of the housing, and the temporal change amount of the feature portion of the subject from the change amount calculation unit 140, the switching determination portion 150 The temporal change amount is compared with a first threshold relating to the change amount, and it is determined whether or not it is necessary to switch the display format of the display image.
 例えば、切替判定部150は、被写体の特徴部分の時間的な変化量が第1の閾値以上である場合、表示形式の切り替えが必要であると判定し、被写体の特徴部分の時間的な変化量が第1の閾値未満である場合には、表示画像の表示形式の切り替えが不要であると判定する。
 つまり、筐体が所定量以上傾斜したと判定された場合であって、ホールド機能がオンに設定されている場合において、被写体の特徴部分の時間的な変化量が第1の閾値以上であるときは、切替判定部150は、表示形式の切り替えが必要(換言すれば、ホールド機能によるホールド処理が不要)であると判定し、被写体の特徴部分の時間的な変化量が第1の閾値未満である場合には、切替判定部150は、表示画像の表示形式の切り替えが不要(換言すれば、ホールド機能によるホールド処理が必要)であると判定する。一例において、被写体(ユーザの顔等)と筐体(本体)との間の相対姿勢の変化/遷移を検出した結果に基づいて、表示画像の表示形式が制御され得る。相対姿勢の変化/遷移が比較的大きい場合、表示形式を切り替える。相対姿勢の変化/遷移が比較的小さいい場合、表示形式を切り替えない。
For example, the switching determination unit 150 determines that the display format needs to be switched when the temporal change amount of the feature portion of the subject is equal to or greater than a first threshold, and the temporal change amount of the feature portion of the subject. Is less than the first threshold value, it is determined that it is not necessary to switch the display format of the display image.
That is, when it is determined that the housing is tilted by a predetermined amount or more and the hold function is set to ON, the temporal change amount of the feature portion of the subject is equal to or greater than the first threshold value The switching determination unit 150 determines that the display format needs to be switched (in other words, the hold processing by the hold function is unnecessary), and the temporal change amount of the feature portion of the subject is less than the first threshold value. In some cases, the switching determination unit 150 determines that switching of the display format of the display image is unnecessary (in other words, hold processing by the hold function is necessary). In one example, the display format of the display image can be controlled based on the result of detecting the change / transition of the relative posture between the subject (such as the user's face) and the housing (main body). When the change / transition of the relative posture is relatively large, the display format is switched. When the change / transition of the relative posture is relatively small, the display format is not switched.
 なお、被写体の特徴部分の時間的な変化量と比較する第1の閾値は、ユーザが、筐体を回転させるなどして筐体を傾斜させる際に、当該ユーザが筐体の傾斜に伴って自身の顔(例えば、両目を結ぶ直線)を意図的に傾斜させたか否かを判定するための値である。
 筐体の傾斜に伴って自身の顔を意図的に傾斜させている例は、例えば、図5(b)に示すような場合である。一方、図5(a)は、ユーザが、筐体のみを90度傾斜させた際に、筐体の傾斜に連れて自身の顔を意図的に傾斜させていない例である。
 図5(a)の場合、被写体の特徴部分の変化量は90度となる。図5(b)の場合、被写体の特徴部分の変化量は略0度となる。また、図示しないが、筐体が90度傾斜し、ユーザが筐体と同一方向に50度傾斜したときは、被写体の特徴部分の変化量は40度になる。
 以上から、例えば、第1の閾値は、数度程度~45度程度の角度としてもよい。例えば、第1の閾値は、5、10、15、20、25、30、35、40、又は45度にできる。
 例えば、第1の閾値を30度とした場合、ユーザが、筐体を時計回りに90度傾斜させた際に、顔を時計回りに60度以上傾斜させると、変化量は第1の閾値未満となるため、ホールド機能によるホールド処理が働く。
Note that the first threshold value to be compared with the temporal change amount of the characteristic part of the subject is that when the user tilts the casing by rotating the casing, the user moves along with the tilt of the casing. It is a value for determining whether or not its own face (for example, a straight line connecting both eyes) is intentionally inclined.
An example in which the user's face is intentionally inclined with the inclination of the housing is, for example, a case as shown in FIG. On the other hand, FIG. 5A is an example in which the user does not intentionally tilt his / her face along with the tilt of the casing when the user tilts only the casing by 90 degrees.
In the case of FIG. 5A, the amount of change in the characteristic part of the subject is 90 degrees. In the case of FIG. 5B, the amount of change in the characteristic portion of the subject is approximately 0 degrees. Although not shown, when the case is inclined 90 degrees and the user is inclined 50 degrees in the same direction as the case, the amount of change in the characteristic portion of the subject is 40 degrees.
From the above, for example, the first threshold value may be an angle of about several degrees to about 45 degrees. For example, the first threshold can be 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, or 45 degrees.
For example, when the first threshold is set to 30 degrees, when the user tilts the casing 90 degrees clockwise and the face is tilted 60 degrees or more clockwise, the amount of change is less than the first threshold. Therefore, hold processing by the hold function works.
 切替判定部150は、表示形式の切り替えが必要であると判定した場合には、筐体の傾斜量、及び、筐体の傾斜方向を切替処理部180に出力する。一方、切替判定部150は、表示形式の切り替えが不要であると判定した場合には、表示形式を維持する旨の通知(情報)を切替制限部160に出力する。 When it is determined that the display format needs to be switched, the switching determination unit 150 outputs the tilt amount of the housing and the tilt direction of the housing to the switching processing unit 180. On the other hand, when the switching determination unit 150 determines that switching of the display format is unnecessary, the switching determination unit 150 outputs a notification (information) to the effect that the display format is maintained to the switching restriction unit 160.
 切替制限部160は、表示形式を維持する旨の通知を切替判定部150から取得した場合、表示画像の表示形式を、筐体の傾斜量及び筐体の傾斜方向に応じて切り替えないように制御する。例えば、切替制限部160は、何もしないか、若しくは、表示形式を維持する旨の通知(情報)を切替処理部180に出力する。 When the switching restriction unit 160 obtains a notification to maintain the display format from the switching determination unit 150, the switching limitation unit 160 controls the display format of the display image so as not to be switched according to the tilt amount of the housing and the tilt direction of the housing. To do. For example, the switching restriction unit 160 outputs nothing (or a notification (information) to the effect that the display format is maintained) to the switching processing unit 180.
 切替処理部180は、筐体の傾斜量、及び、筐体の傾斜方向を切替判定部150から取得した場合、筐体の傾斜量、及び、筐体の傾斜方向に応じて表示画像の表示形式を切り替えるように制御する。例えば、切替処理部180は、筐体の傾斜量、及び、筐体の傾斜方向に基づいて、表示形式(切替後の表示形式)を決定し、決定した表示形式をタッチスクリーンコントローラ42に出力する。これにより、タッチスクリーン44に表示されている表示画像が、図4に示すように、切り替わる。
 一方、切替処理部180は、表示形式を維持する旨の通知(情報)を切替制限部160から取得した場合には、何もしない。
When the switching processing unit 180 acquires the tilt amount of the casing and the tilt direction of the casing from the switching determination unit 150, the display processing of the display image is performed according to the tilt amount of the casing and the tilt direction of the casing. Control to switch. For example, the switching processing unit 180 determines a display format (display format after switching) based on the tilt amount of the housing and the tilt direction of the housing, and outputs the determined display format to the touch screen controller 42. . As a result, the display image displayed on the touch screen 44 is switched as shown in FIG.
On the other hand, the switching processing unit 180 does nothing when the notification (information) to maintain the display format is acquired from the switching restriction unit 160.
 以上のように、表示制御部100は、筐体が所定量以上傾斜したと判定された場合であって、表示形式の切替機能、及び、ホールド機能がオンに設定されている場合には、被写体の特徴部分の時間的な変化量に応じて、タッチスクリーン44における表示画像の表示形式を選択的に切り替える。 As described above, the display control unit 100 determines that the case is tilted by a predetermined amount or more, and if the display format switching function and the hold function are set to ON, The display format of the display image on the touch screen 44 is selectively switched in accordance with the temporal change amount of the feature portion.
 なお、切替判定部150は、表示形式を維持する旨の通知(情報)を切替処理部180に出力してもよい。換言すれば、切替判定部150は、切替制限部160の機能を有してもよい(切替制限部160は切替判定部150に吸収されてもよい)。 Note that the switching determination unit 150 may output a notification (information) indicating that the display format is maintained to the switching processing unit 180. In other words, the switching determination unit 150 may have the function of the switching restriction unit 160 (the switching restriction unit 160 may be absorbed by the switching determination unit 150).
 図7は、表示形式の切り替えの設定に関する処理(設定処理)の流れを示すフローチャートの一例である。例えば、図7のフローチャートは、自動設定処理の流れの一例である。図7のフローチャートは、電子機器3の電源オン時において随時(例えば定期的に)開始する。なお、出荷時において、記憶部30には、切替制御のオン/オフ、ホールド機能のオン/オフの何れかが設定(記憶)されているものとする。 FIG. 7 is an example of a flowchart showing a flow of processing (setting processing) related to setting of display format switching. For example, the flowchart of FIG. 7 is an example of the flow of automatic setting processing. The flowchart in FIG. 7 starts at any time (for example, periodically) when the electronic apparatus 3 is powered on. At the time of shipment, it is assumed that the storage unit 30 is set (stored) with ON / OFF of the switching control and ON / OFF of the hold function.
 図7において、プロセッサ10(設定認識部110)は、記憶部30を参照し、切替機能がオンである否かを判断する(ステップS10)。 In FIG. 7, the processor 10 (setting recognition unit 110) refers to the storage unit 30 and determines whether or not the switching function is on (step S10).
 切替機能がオンである場合(ステップS10:Yes)、プロセッサ10(非図示のアプリ実行部)は、切替可能な表示形式の表示画像を表示するアプリケーションを実行中であるか否かを判断する(ステップS20)。 When the switching function is on (step S10: Yes), the processor 10 (an application execution unit (not shown)) determines whether an application that displays a display image in a switchable display format is being executed ( Step S20).
 ステップS20において、切替可能な表示形式の表示画像を表示するアプリケーションが実行中である場合(ステップS20:Yes)、プロセッサ10(非図示の節電モード制御部)は、節電モード中であるか否かを判断する(ステップS40)。 In step S20, when an application that displays a display image in a switchable display format is being executed (step S20: Yes), whether or not the processor 10 (power saving mode control unit (not shown)) is in the power saving mode is determined. Is determined (step S40).
 ステップS40において、節電モード(省エネルギーモード)中でない場合(ステップS40:No)、プロセッサ10(設定認識部110)は、記憶部30を参照し、ホールド機能がオフである否かを判断する(ステップS50)。ホールド機能がオフである場合(ステップS50:Yes)、プロセッサ10(設定部190)は、ホールド機能をオンに設定する(ステップS60)。一方、ホールド機能がオフでない場合(ステップS50:No)、即ち、ホールド機能が既にオンである場合、ステップS60を飛ばして、本フローチャートは終了する。 In step S40, when not in the power saving mode (energy saving mode) (step S40: No), the processor 10 (setting recognition unit 110) refers to the storage unit 30 and determines whether or not the hold function is off (step). S50). When the hold function is off (step S50: Yes), the processor 10 (setting unit 190) sets the hold function on (step S60). On the other hand, if the hold function is not off (step S50: No), that is, if the hold function is already on, step S60 is skipped, and this flowchart ends.
 ステップS40において、節電モード中である場合(ステップS40:Yes)、プロセッサ10(設定認識部110)は、記憶部30を参照し、ホールド機能がオンであるか否かを判断する(ステップS52)。ホールド機能がオンである場合(ステップS52:Yes)、プロセッサ10(設定部190)は、ホールド機能をオフに設定する(ステップS62)。一方、ホールド機能がオンでない場合(ステップS52:No)、即ち、ホールド機能が既にオフである場合、ステップS62を飛ばして、本フローチャートは終了する。 In step S40, when in the power saving mode (step S40: Yes), the processor 10 (setting recognition unit 110) refers to the storage unit 30 and determines whether or not the hold function is on (step S52). . When the hold function is on (step S52: Yes), the processor 10 (setting unit 190) sets the hold function to off (step S62). On the other hand, if the hold function is not on (step S52: No), that is, if the hold function is already off, step S62 is skipped, and this flowchart ends.
 ステップS20において、切替可能な表示形式の表示画像を表示するアプリケーションが実行中でない場合(ステップS20:No)、プロセッサ10(設定部190)は、切替機能をオフに設定し(ステップS30)、ステップS62に進む。 In step S20, when an application for displaying a display image in a switchable display format is not being executed (step S20: No), the processor 10 (setting unit 190) sets the switching function to off (step S30), and step Proceed to S62.
 ステップS10において、切替機能がオフである場合(ステップS10:No)、プロセッサ10(非図示のアプリ実行部)は、切替可能な表示形式の表示画像を表示するアプリケーションを実行中であるか否かを判断する(ステップS22)。 In step S10, when the switching function is off (step S10: No), the processor 10 (an application execution unit (not shown)) is executing an application that displays a display image in a switchable display format. Is determined (step S22).
 ステップS22において、切替可能な表示形式の表示画像を表示するアプリケーションが実行中である場合(ステップS22:Yes)、プロセッサ10(設定部190)は、切替機能をオンに設定し(ステップS32)、ステップS40に進む。
 ステップS22において、切替可能な表示形式の表示画像を表示するアプリケーションが実行中でない場合(ステップS22:No)、本フローチャートは終了する。
 なお、本発明の第2の実施形態による電子機器4における設定処理(切替機能の設定、ホールド機能の設定、追随機能(後述)の設定)についても同様である。
In step S22, when the application which displays the display image of the switchable display format is being executed (step S22: Yes), the processor 10 (setting unit 190) sets the switching function to on (step S32), Proceed to step S40.
In step S22, when an application for displaying a display image in a switchable display format is not being executed (step S22: No), this flowchart ends.
The same applies to the setting processing (setting of the switching function, setting of the hold function, setting of the follow function (described later)) in the electronic device 4 according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
 図8は、電子機器3における表示形式の制御処理の流れを示すフローチャートの一例である。図8のフローチャートは、表示形式の切替機能がオンに設定されている場合において、筐体が所定量以上傾斜したときに開始する。筐体が所定量以上傾斜したか否かは、上述の如く、傾斜量判定部120によって判定される。 FIG. 8 is an example of a flowchart showing the flow of display format control processing in the electronic device 3. The flowchart in FIG. 8 starts when the housing is tilted by a predetermined amount or more when the display format switching function is set to ON. Whether or not the casing is tilted by a predetermined amount or more is determined by the tilt amount determination unit 120 as described above.
 図8において、設定認識部110(又は傾斜量判定部120)は、記憶部30を参照し、ホールド機能がオンである否かを判断する(ステップS110)。 8, the setting recognition unit 110 (or the inclination amount determination unit 120) refers to the storage unit 30 and determines whether or not the hold function is on (step S110).
 ステップS110においてホールド機能がオンである場合(ステップS110:Yes)、傾斜量判定部120は、筐体の傾斜量、及び、筐体の傾斜方向を特徴領域抽出部130に出力する。次いで、特徴領域抽出部130は、筐体の傾斜前後の撮像画像の夫々から被写体の特徴部分の抽出を試みて(ステップS120)、夫々から被写体の特徴部分を抽出できたか否かを判断する(ステップS130)。なお、例えば、特徴領域抽出部130は、筐体の傾斜前において所定の時間ごとに選択的に撮像画像における被写体の特徴部分の抽出を行ってもよい。 If the hold function is on in step S110 (step S110: Yes), the tilt amount determination unit 120 outputs the tilt amount of the housing and the tilt direction of the housing to the feature region extraction unit 130. Next, the feature region extraction unit 130 tries to extract the feature portion of the subject from each of the captured images before and after the inclination of the housing (step S120), and determines whether the feature portion of the subject has been extracted from each of them (step S120). Step S130). Note that, for example, the feature region extraction unit 130 may selectively extract the feature portion of the subject in the captured image at every predetermined time before the casing is tilted.
 ステップS130において、夫々から被写体の特徴部分を抽出できた場合には(ステップS130:Yes)、特徴領域抽出部130は、筐体の傾斜量、及び、筐体の傾斜方向とともに、被写体の特徴部分を示す情報を変化量算出部140に出力する。次いで、変化量算出部140は、筐体の傾斜前における撮像画像(基準画像)と筐体の傾斜後における撮像画像(遷移画像)とに基づいて被写体の特徴部分の時間的な変化量を算出し(ステップS140)、算出した変化量を、筐体の傾斜量、及び、筐体の傾斜方向とともに切替判定部150に出力する。次いで、切替判定部150は、被写体の特徴部分の時間的な変化量が第1の閾値以上であるか否かを判定する(ステップS150)。 In step S130, when the feature portion of the subject can be extracted from each (step S130: Yes), the feature region extraction unit 130 determines the feature portion of the subject along with the amount of inclination of the housing and the direction of inclination of the housing. Is output to the change amount calculation unit 140. Next, the change amount calculation unit 140 calculates the temporal change amount of the feature portion of the subject based on the captured image (reference image) before the casing is tilted and the captured image (transition image) after the casing is tilted. In step S140, the calculated change amount is output to the switching determination unit 150 together with the inclination amount of the housing and the inclination direction of the housing. Next, the switching determination unit 150 determines whether or not the temporal change amount of the feature portion of the subject is equal to or greater than the first threshold (step S150).
 ステップS150において、被写体の特徴部分の時間的な変化量が第1の閾値未満であると判定した場合(ステップS150:No)、切替判定部150は、表示画像の表示形式の切り替えが不要であると判定し、表示形式を維持する旨の通知(情報)を切替制限部160に出力する。表示形式を維持する旨の通知(情報)を取得した切替制限部160は、表示画像の表示形式を切り替えないように、即ち、表示形式の切り替えをホールドするように制御する(ステップS170)。例えば、切替制限部160は、表示形式を維持する旨の通知(情報)を切替処理部180に出力する。表示形式を維持する旨の通知(情報)を切替制限部160から取得した切替処理部180は、何もしない。そして、本フローチャートは終了する。なお、ステップS170の矩形が破線であるのは、切替処理部180が、何もしない旨を表している。 If it is determined in step S150 that the temporal change amount of the characteristic portion of the subject is less than the first threshold (step S150: No), the switching determination unit 150 does not need to switch the display format of the display image. And a notification (information) to maintain the display format is output to the switching restriction unit 160. The switching restriction unit 160 that has acquired the notification (information) that the display format is maintained controls to not switch the display format of the display image, that is, to hold the switching of the display format (step S170). For example, the switching restriction unit 160 outputs a notification (information) to maintain the display format to the switching processing unit 180. The switching processing unit 180 that has acquired the notification (information) to maintain the display format from the switching restriction unit 160 does nothing. Then, this flowchart ends. Note that the rectangle in step S170 is a broken line indicates that the switching processing unit 180 does nothing.
 ステップS110においてホールド機能がオンでない場合(ステップS110:No)、傾斜量判定部120は、筐体の傾斜量、及び、筐体の傾斜方向とともに、ホールド機能がオフに設定されている旨の通知(情報)を切替判定部150に出力する。筐体の傾斜量、及び、筐体の傾斜方向とともに、ホールド機能がオフに設定されている旨の通知(情報)を取得した切替判定部150は、表示形式の切り替えが必要であると判定し、筐体の傾斜量、及び、筐体の傾斜方向を切替処理部180に出力する。筐体の傾斜量、及び、筐体の傾斜方向を取得した切替処理部180は、筐体の傾斜量、及び、筐体の傾斜方向に応じて表示画像の表示形式を切り替えるように制御する(ステップS160)。例えば、切替処理部180は、筐体の傾斜量、及び、筐体の傾斜方向に基づいて、表示形式(切替後の表示形式)を決定し、決定した表示形式をタッチスクリーンコントローラ42に出力する。そして、本フローチャートは終了する。 When the hold function is not on in step S110 (step S110: No), the tilt amount determination unit 120 notifies that the hold function is set to be off together with the tilt amount of the housing and the tilt direction of the housing. (Information) is output to the switching determination unit 150. The switch determination unit 150 that has acquired the notification (information) that the hold function is set to OFF together with the tilt amount of the casing and the tilt direction of the casing determines that the display format needs to be switched. , The tilt amount of the casing and the tilt direction of the casing are output to the switching processing unit 180. The switching processing unit 180 that acquires the tilt amount of the housing and the tilt direction of the housing controls the display image display format to be switched according to the tilt amount of the housing and the tilt direction of the housing ( Step S160). For example, the switching processing unit 180 determines a display format (display format after switching) based on the tilt amount of the housing and the tilt direction of the housing, and outputs the determined display format to the touch screen controller 42. . Then, this flowchart ends.
 ステップS130において、筐体の傾斜前後の撮像画像の少なくとも一方から被写体の特徴部分を抽出できなかった場合には(ステップS130:No)、特徴領域抽出部130は、筐体の傾斜量、及び、筐体の傾斜方向とともに、特徴部分を抽出できなかった旨の通知を切替判定部150に出力する。筐体の傾斜量、及び、筐体の傾斜方向とともに、特徴部分を抽出できなかった旨の通知(情報)を取得した切替判定部150は、表示形式の切り替えが必要であると判定し、筐体の傾斜量、及び、筐体の傾斜方向を切替処理部180に出力する。以下、ステップS110(No)の場合と同様の処理を行って、本フローチャートは終了する。また、被写体の特徴部分を抽出できなかった旨の通知(情報)を取得した切替判定部150は、ホールド機能をオフに設定して、上述の節電モードに切り替える。 In step S130, when the feature portion of the subject cannot be extracted from at least one of the captured images before and after the inclination of the casing (step S130: No), the feature region extraction unit 130 determines the amount of inclination of the casing, and A notification that the feature portion could not be extracted is output to the switching determination unit 150 along with the inclination direction of the housing. The switch determination unit 150 that has acquired the notification (information) that the feature portion could not be extracted together with the tilt amount of the casing and the tilt direction of the casing determines that the display format needs to be switched, and The body tilt amount and the tilt direction of the housing are output to the switching processing unit 180. Thereafter, the same processing as in the case of step S110 (No) is performed, and this flowchart ends. In addition, the switching determination unit 150 that has acquired the notification (information) that the feature portion of the subject could not be extracted sets the hold function to OFF and switches to the power saving mode described above.
 ステップS150において、被写体の特徴部分の時間的な変化量が第1の閾値以上であると判定した場合には(ステップS150:Yes)、切替判定部150は、表示画像の表示形式の切り替えが必要であると判定し、筐体の傾斜量、及び、筐体の傾斜方向を切替処理部180に出力する。以下、ステップS110(No)の場合と同様の処理を行って、本フローチャートは終了する。 If it is determined in step S150 that the temporal change amount of the feature portion of the subject is equal to or greater than the first threshold (step S150: Yes), the switching determination unit 150 needs to switch the display format of the display image. And the inclination amount of the casing and the inclination direction of the casing are output to the switching processing unit 180. Thereafter, the same processing as in the case of step S110 (No) is performed, and this flowchart ends.
 図9乃至図12は、表示形式の制御処理を説明する一例である。なお、図9乃至図12において、表示形式の切替機能及びホールド機能は何れもオンに設定されているものとする。 FIG. 9 to FIG. 12 are examples illustrating the display format control processing. 9 to 12, it is assumed that both the display format switching function and the hold function are set to ON.
 図9(a)は、ユーザUが、縦向き状態のタッチスクリーン44に表示された表示画像HG(縦長画像又は縦向き画像)を見ている様子を表している。図9(b)は、図9(a)の状態において、フロントカメラ62によって撮像されている撮像画像SG(スルー画)を表している。図9(c)は、図9(a)の状態において、タッチスクリーン44に表示されている表示画像HG(縦長画像)である。 FIG. 9A shows a state where the user U is viewing the display image HG 3 (vertically long image or vertically oriented image) displayed on the touch screen 44 in the vertically oriented state. FIG. 9B shows a captured image SG 3 (through image) captured by the front camera 62 in the state of FIG. 9A. FIG. 9C is a display image HG 3 (vertically long image) displayed on the touch screen 44 in the state of FIG. 9A.
 図10(a)は、図9(a)の状態から、ユーザUが、筐体のみを所定量以上傾斜させた様子を表している。図10(b)は、図10(a)の場合における、撮像画像SG’(スルー画)を表している。図10(c)は、図10(a)の場合における、タッチスクリーン44に表示されている表示画像HG’(横長画像又は横向き画像)である。 FIG. 10A shows a state in which the user U tilts only the casing by a predetermined amount or more from the state of FIG. 9A. FIG. 10B shows the captured image SG 3 ′ (through image) in the case of FIG. FIG. 10C is a display image HG 3 ′ (landscape image or landscape image) displayed on the touch screen 44 in the case of FIG.
 即ち、図8のフローチャートにおいて、切替判定部150は、被写体の特徴部分の時間的な変化量が第1の閾値以上であると判定し(ステップS150:Yes)、切替処理部180は、筐体の傾斜量、及び、筐体の傾斜方向に応じて表示画像の表示形式を切り替えるように制御する(ステップS160)。つまり、図10の如く筐体のみを所定量以上傾斜させた場合には、ユーザUが見易いように、縦長画像が横長画像に切り替える(又は、図4(c)、(d)に示すように縮小画像に切り替える)。
 なお、表示形式の切替機能がオフに設定されている場合には、表示形式は切り替えない。
That is, in the flowchart of FIG. 8, the switching determination unit 150 determines that the temporal change amount of the characteristic portion of the subject is equal to or greater than the first threshold (step S150: Yes), and the switching processing unit 180 Control is performed so as to switch the display format of the display image in accordance with the amount of inclination and the inclination direction of the housing (step S160). That is, when only the casing is tilted by a predetermined amount or more as shown in FIG. 10, the portrait image is switched to the landscape image so that the user U can easily see (or as shown in FIGS. 4C and 4D). Switch to reduced image).
When the display format switching function is set to OFF, the display format is not switched.
 図11(a)は、図9(a)の状態から、ユーザUが、筐体とともに自身を所定量以上傾斜させた様子を表している。図11(b)は、図11(a)の場合における、撮像画像SG(スルー画)を表している。図11(c)は、図11(a)の場合における、タッチスクリーン44に表示されている表示画像HG(縦長画像)である。図11(c)の表示画像HGの表示形式は、図9(c)の表示画像HGの表示形式と同一である。 Fig.11 (a) represents a mode that the user U inclined itself with the housing | casing more than predetermined amount from the state of Fig.9 (a). FIG. 11B shows the captured image SG 3 (through image) in the case of FIG. FIG. 11C is a display image HG 3 (vertically long image) displayed on the touch screen 44 in the case of FIG. The display format of the display image HG 3 in FIG. 11C is the same as the display format of the display image HG 3 in FIG.
 即ち、図8のフローチャートにおいて、切替判定部150は、被写体の特徴部分の時間的な変化量が第1の閾値未満であると判定し(ステップS150:No)、切替制限部160は、表示画像の表示形式を切り替えないように、即ち、切り替えをホールドするように制御する(ステップS170)。つまり、図11の如く筐体とともに自身を所定量以上傾斜させた場合には、ユーザUが見易いように、縦長画像を横長画像に切り替えない(又は、図4(c)、(d)に示すように縮小画像に切り替えない)。
 なお、表示形式の切替機能はオンに設定され、かつ、ホールド機能はオフに設定されている場合には、表示形式は切り替える。
That is, in the flowchart of FIG. 8, the switching determination unit 150 determines that the temporal change amount of the feature portion of the subject is less than the first threshold (step S150: No), and the switching restriction unit 160 displays the display image. The display format is controlled not to be switched, that is, the switching is held (step S170). That is, when the user and the housing are tilted by a predetermined amount or more as shown in FIG. 11, the portrait image is not switched to the landscape image so that the user U can easily see (or shown in FIGS. 4C and 4D). So do not switch to reduced image).
When the display format switching function is set to ON and the hold function is set to OFF, the display format is switched.
 なお、図12(a)は、図9(a)の状態から、ユーザUが、自身のみを所定量以上傾斜させた様子を表している。図12(b)は、図12(a)の場合における、撮像画像SG’’(スルー画)を表している。図12(c)は、図12(a)の場合における、タッチスクリーン44に表示されている表示画像HG(縦長画像)である。図12(c)の表示画像HGの表示形式は、図9(c)の表示画像HGの表示形式と同一である。 FIG. 12A shows a state in which only the user U tilts himself or herself by a predetermined amount or more from the state of FIG. 9A. FIG. 12B shows the captured image SG 3 ″ (through image) in the case of FIG. FIG. 12C is a display image HG 3 (vertically long image) displayed on the touch screen 44 in the case of FIG. The display format of the display image HG 3 in FIG. 12C is the same as the display format of the display image HG 3 in FIG.
 即ち、図7のフローチャートは、上述の如く、筐体が所定量以上傾斜した場合に開始するものであるため、図12の如く自身のみを所定量以上傾斜させた場合には、表示形式は切り替わらない。 That is, since the flowchart of FIG. 7 starts when the casing is tilted by a predetermined amount or more as described above, the display format is switched when only itself is tilted by a predetermined amount or more as shown in FIG. Absent.
 以上、電子機器3によれば、意図しない画面形式(画面表示型)の切り替えが生じないため、ユーザの利便性を向上させることができる。例えば、ユーザが、図5(b)に示すように筐体とともに自分の顔を所定量以上傾斜させた場合には、図4に例示したような表示形式の切り替えがホールド機能によって生じないため、ユーザの利便性を向上させることができる。 As described above, according to the electronic device 3, since an unintended screen format (screen display type) is not switched, user convenience can be improved. For example, when the user tilts his / her face together with the housing by a predetermined amount or more as shown in FIG. 5B, the display function switching as illustrated in FIG. 4 is not caused by the hold function. User convenience can be improved.
 なお、上記では、電子機器3は、タッチスクリーン44の前方側の被写体を撮像するフロントカメラ62(第1撮像部)による撮像画像を利用して、表示画像の表示形式を制御する態様を説明したが、電子機器3は、フロントカメラ62による撮像画像に加え、タッチスクリーン44の後方側の被写体を撮像するバックカメラ64(第2撮像部)による撮像画像を利用して、表示画像の表示形式を制御してもよい。つまり、表示制御部100は、前方側を撮像した被写体の特徴部分の時間的な変化量と、後方側を撮像した被写体の特徴部分の時間的な変化量とに基づいて、表示画像の表示形式を制御するようにしてもよい。 In the above description, the electronic device 3 has described a mode in which the display format of the display image is controlled using an image captured by the front camera 62 (first imaging unit) that captures an object on the front side of the touch screen 44. However, the electronic device 3 uses the image captured by the back camera 64 (second image capturing unit) that captures the subject behind the touch screen 44 in addition to the image captured by the front camera 62 to change the display format of the display image. You may control. That is, the display control unit 100 displays the display format of the display image based on the temporal change amount of the characteristic part of the subject imaged on the front side and the temporal change amount of the characteristic part of the subject imaged on the rear side. May be controlled.
 例えば、表示制御部100は、筐体が所定量以上傾斜した場合に、前方側を撮像した被写体の特徴部分の変化率(フロントカメラ62による撮像画像上の被写体の特徴部分の変化率)である前方側変化率と、後方側を撮像した被写体の特徴部分の変化率(バックカメラ64による撮像画像上の被写体の特徴部分の変化率)である後方側変化率とを算出し、前方側変化率が後方側変化率以上であるときは、表示画像の表示形式を変えるように制御し、前方側変化率が後方側変化率未満であるときは、表示画像の表示形式を変えないように制御する。 For example, the display control unit 100 is the rate of change of the characteristic part of the subject imaged on the front side (the rate of change of the characteristic part of the subject on the image captured by the front camera 62) when the casing is tilted by a predetermined amount or more. A front side change rate is calculated by calculating a front side change rate and a rear side change rate that is a change rate of the feature portion of the subject imaged on the rear side (change rate of the feature portion of the subject on the image captured by the back camera 64). Is controlled so as to change the display format of the display image, and when the forward change rate is less than the backward change rate, the display format of the display image is not changed. .
 より詳細には、表示制御部100は、筐体が所定量以上傾斜した場合であってホールド機能がオンに設定(表示形式の切替機能もオンに設定)されている場合は、前方側変化率と後方側変化率とを算出し、前方側変化率が後方側変化率以上であるときは、表示画像の表示形式を変えるように制御し、前方側変化率が後方側変化率未満であるときは、表示画像の表示形式を変えないように制御する。
 一方、表示制御部100は、筐体が所定量以上傾斜した場合であってホールド機能がオフに設定(表示形式の切替機能はオンに設定)されている場合は、表示画像の表示形式を変えるように制御する。
More specifically, the display control unit 100, when the housing is tilted by a predetermined amount or more and the hold function is set to ON (the display format switching function is also set to ON), the front side change rate When the forward change rate is equal to or greater than the backward change rate, control is performed to change the display format of the display image, and the forward change rate is less than the backward change rate. Controls so as not to change the display format of the display image.
On the other hand, the display control unit 100 changes the display format of the display image when the case is tilted by a predetermined amount or more and the hold function is set to off (the display format switching function is set to on). To control.
 図13は、電子機器3における表示形式の制御処理の他の例を示すフローチャートである。例えば、図13は、フロントカメラ62による撮像画像に加え、バックカメラ64による撮像画像を利用して表示画像の表示形式を制御する態様における、処理の流れを表している。なお、図13のフローチャートは、図8のフローチャートと同様、表示形式の切替機能がオンに設定されている場合において、筐体が所定量以上傾斜したときに開始する。筐体が所定量以上傾斜したか否かは、傾斜量判定部120によって判定される。なお、図8と同一のステップ番号は、図8と同一の処理である。 FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing another example of display format control processing in the electronic apparatus 3. For example, FIG. 13 shows a processing flow in a mode in which the display format of the display image is controlled using the image captured by the back camera 64 in addition to the image captured by the front camera 62. Note that the flowchart of FIG. 13 starts when the casing is tilted by a predetermined amount or more when the display format switching function is set to ON, as in the flowchart of FIG. Whether or not the housing is inclined by a predetermined amount or more is determined by the inclination amount determination unit 120. The same step numbers as those in FIG. 8 are the same processes as those in FIG.
 図13において、設定認識部110(又は傾斜量判定部120)は、ホールド機能がオンである否かを判断する(ステップS110)。 In FIG. 13, the setting recognition unit 110 (or the inclination amount determination unit 120) determines whether or not the hold function is on (step S110).
 ステップS110においてホールド機能がオンである場合(ステップS110:Yes)、傾斜量判定部120は、筐体の傾斜量、及び、筐体の傾斜方向を特徴領域抽出部130に出力する。次いで、特徴領域抽出部130は、両撮像画像(フロントカメラ62による撮像画像及びバックカメラ64による撮像画像)における傾斜前後の撮像画像の夫々(筐体の傾斜前のフロントカメラ62による撮像画像、筐体の傾斜前のバックカメラ64による撮像画像、筐体の傾斜後のフロントカメラ62による撮像画像、筐体の傾斜後のバックカメラ64による撮像画像)から被写体の特徴部分の抽出を試みて(ステップS122)、夫々の撮像画像から、被写体の特徴部分を抽出できたか否かを判断する(ステップS132)。 If the hold function is on in step S110 (step S110: Yes), the tilt amount determination unit 120 outputs the tilt amount of the housing and the tilt direction of the housing to the feature region extraction unit 130. Next, the feature region extraction unit 130 (images taken by the front camera 62 before the tilt of the housing, images of the housing before and after the tilt of the housing) in each of the captured images (the images taken by the front camera 62 and the images taken by the back camera 64). Attempt to extract the characteristic part of the subject from the image captured by the back camera 64 before tilting the body, the image captured by the front camera 62 after tilting the casing, and the image captured by the back camera 64 after tilting the casing (step) In step S122, it is determined whether or not the feature portion of the subject has been extracted from each captured image (step S132).
 ステップS132において、両撮像画像における傾斜前後の撮像画像の夫々から被写体の特徴部分を抽出できた場合には(ステップS132:Yes)、特徴領域抽出部130は、筐体の傾斜量、及び、筐体の傾斜方向とともに、被写体の特徴部分を示す情報を変化量算出部140に出力する。次いで、変化量算出部140は、両撮像画像における、被写体の特徴部分の時間的な変化率(前方側変化率及び後方側変化率)を算出し(ステップS142)、算出した、両撮像画像における特徴部分の時間的な変化率を、筐体の傾斜量、及び、筐体の傾斜方向とともに切替判定部150に出力する。次いで、切替判定部150は、前方側変化率が後方側変化率未満であるか否かを判定する(ステップS152)。 In step S132, when the feature portion of the subject can be extracted from each of the captured images before and after the tilt in both captured images (step S132: Yes), the feature region extraction unit 130 determines the amount of tilt of the casing and the casing. Information indicating the characteristic part of the subject is output to the change amount calculation unit 140 along with the body tilt direction. Next, the change amount calculation unit 140 calculates temporal change rates (front-side change rate and rear-side change rate) of the characteristic portion of the subject in both captured images (step S142), and the calculated both captured images The temporal change rate of the characteristic portion is output to the switching determination unit 150 together with the amount of inclination of the casing and the inclination direction of the casing. Next, the switching determination unit 150 determines whether the front side change rate is less than the rear side change rate (step S152).
 ステップS152において、前方側変化率が後方側変化率未満であると判定した場合(ステップS152:Yes)、切替判定部150は、表示画像の表示形式の切り替えが不要であると判定し、表示形式を維持する旨の通知(情報)を切替制限部160に出力する。表示形式を維持する旨の通知(情報)を取得した切替制限部160は、表示画像の表示形式を切り替えないように、即ち、表示形式の切り替えをホールドするように制御する(ステップS170)。そして、本フローチャートは終了する。 In step S152, when it is determined that the front side change rate is less than the rear side change rate (step S152: Yes), the switching determination unit 150 determines that switching of the display format of the display image is not necessary, and the display format. Is output to the switching restriction unit 160. The switching restriction unit 160 that has acquired the notification (information) that the display format is maintained controls to not switch the display format of the display image, that is, to hold the switching of the display format (step S170). Then, this flowchart ends.
 ステップS110においてホールド機能がオンでない場合(ステップS110:No)、傾斜量判定部120は、筐体の傾斜量、及び、筐体の傾斜方向とともに、ホールド機能がオフに設定されている旨の通知(情報)を切替判定部150に出力する。次いで、切替判定部150は、表示形式の切り替えが必要であると判定し、筐体の傾斜量、及び、筐体の傾斜方向を切替処理部180に出力する。次いで、切替処理部180は、筐体の傾斜量、及び、筐体の傾斜方向に応じて表示画像の表示形式を切り替えるように制御する(ステップS160)。そして、本フローチャートは終了する。 When the hold function is not turned on in step S110 (step S110: No), the tilt amount determination unit 120 notifies that the hold function is set off together with the tilt amount of the housing and the tilt direction of the housing. (Information) is output to the switching determination unit 150. Next, the switching determination unit 150 determines that the display format needs to be switched, and outputs the tilt amount of the housing and the tilt direction of the housing to the switching processing unit 180. Next, the switching processing unit 180 performs control so as to switch the display format of the display image according to the tilt amount of the housing and the tilt direction of the housing (step S160). Then, this flowchart ends.
 ステップS132において、両撮像画像における筐体の傾斜前後の撮像画像の何れから被写体の特徴部分を抽出できなかった場合(ステップS132:No)、特徴領域抽出部130は、筐体の傾斜量、及び、筐体の傾斜方向とともに、特徴部分を抽出できなかった旨の通知(情報)を切替判定部150に出力する。次いで、切替判定部150は、表示形式の切り替えが必要であると判定し、筐体の傾斜量、及び、筐体の傾斜方向を切替処理部180に出力する。以下、ステップS110(No)の場合と同様の処理を行って、本フローチャートは終了する。 In step S132, if the feature portion of the subject cannot be extracted from any of the captured images before and after the tilt of the casing in both captured images (step S132: No), the feature region extraction unit 130 determines the tilt amount of the casing, and A notification (information) indicating that the feature portion could not be extracted is output to the switching determination unit 150 together with the inclination direction of the housing. Next, the switching determination unit 150 determines that the display format needs to be switched, and outputs the tilt amount of the housing and the tilt direction of the housing to the switching processing unit 180. Thereafter, the same processing as in the case of step S110 (No) is performed, and this flowchart ends.
 ステップS152において、前方側変化率が後方側変化率以上であると判定した場合(ステップS152:No)、切替判定部150は、表示画像の表示形式の切り替えが必要であると判定し、筐体の傾斜量、及び、筐体の傾斜方向を切替処理部180に出力する。以下、ステップS110(No)の場合と同様の処理を行って、本フローチャートは終了する。 When it is determined in step S152 that the front side change rate is equal to or higher than the rear side change rate (step S152: No), the switching determination unit 150 determines that the display format of the display image needs to be switched, and the housing Are output to the switching processing unit 180. Thereafter, the same processing as in the case of step S110 (No) is performed, and this flowchart ends.
 図14乃至図17は、フロントカメラ62による撮像画像に加え、バックカメラ64による撮像画像を利用して表示画像の表示形式を制御する態様における、表示形式の制御処理を説明する一例である。なお、図14乃至図17において、表示形式の切替機能はオンに設定され、かつ、ホールド機能はオンに設定されているものとする。 14 to 17 are an example for explaining display format control processing in a mode in which the display format of the display image is controlled using the image captured by the back camera 64 in addition to the image captured by the front camera 62. 14 to 17, it is assumed that the display format switching function is set to on and the hold function is set to on.
 図14(a)は、ユーザUが、縦向き状態のタッチスクリーン44に表示された表示画像HG(縦長画像)を見ている様子を表している。図14(b)は、図14(a)の状態において、フロントカメラ62によって撮像されている撮像画像SG4-1(スルー画)、及び、バックカメラ64によって撮像されている撮像画像SG4-2(スルー画)を表している。図14(c)は、図14(a)の状態において、タッチスクリーン44に表示されている表示画像HG(縦長画像)である。 FIG. 14A shows a state where the user U is viewing the display image HG 4 (vertically long image) displayed on the touch screen 44 in the portrait orientation. 14 (b) is in the state of FIG. 14 (a), the captured image being captured by the front camera 62 SG 4-1 (through image), and the imaging is imaged by the back camera 64 images SG 4- 2 (through image). FIG. 14C is a display image HG 4 (vertically long image) displayed on the touch screen 44 in the state of FIG.
 図15(a)は、図14(a)の状態から、ユーザUが、筐体のみを所定量以上傾斜させた様子を表している。図15(b)は、図15(a)の場合において、フロントカメラ62によって撮像されている撮像画像SG4-1’(スルー画)、及び、バックカメラ64によって撮像されている撮像画像SG4-2’(スルー画)を表している。図15(b)において、前方側変化率と後方側変化率は同一であるものとする。図15(c)は、図15(a)の場合における、タッチスクリーン44に表示されている表示画像HG’(横長画像)である。 FIG. 15A shows a state in which the user U tilts only the casing by a predetermined amount or more from the state of FIG. FIG. 15B illustrates a captured image SG 4-1 ′ (through image) captured by the front camera 62 and a captured image SG 4 captured by the back camera 64 in the case of FIG. -2 '(through image). In FIG. 15B, it is assumed that the front side change rate and the rear side change rate are the same. FIG. 15C is a display image HG 4 ′ (horizontal image) displayed on the touch screen 44 in the case of FIG.
 即ち、図13のフローチャートにおいて、切替判定部150は、前方側変化率と後方側変化率は同一であるため、前方側変化率が後方側変化率以上であると判定し(ステップS152:No)、切替処理部180は、筐体の傾斜量、及び、筐体の傾斜方向に応じて表示画像の表示形式を切り替えるように制御する(ステップS160)。つまり、図15の如く筐体のみを所定量以上傾斜させた場合には、ユーザUが見易いように、縦長画像が横長画像に切り替える(又は、図4(c)、(d)に示すように縮小画像に切り替える)。
 なお、表示形式の切替機能がオフに設定されている場合には、表示形式は切り替えない。
That is, in the flowchart of FIG. 13, the switching determination unit 150 determines that the front side change rate is equal to or higher than the rear side change rate because the front side change rate and the rear side change rate are the same (step S152: No). The switching processing unit 180 performs control so that the display format of the display image is switched according to the tilt amount of the housing and the tilt direction of the housing (step S160). That is, when only the casing is tilted by a predetermined amount or more as shown in FIG. 15, the portrait image is switched to the landscape image so that the user U can easily see (or as shown in FIGS. 4C and 4D). Switch to reduced image).
When the display format switching function is set to OFF, the display format is not switched.
 図16(a)は、図14(a)の状態から、ユーザUが、筐体とともに自身を所定量以上傾斜させた様子を表している。図16(b)は、図16(a)の場合において、フロントカメラ62によって撮像されている撮像画像SG4-1(スルー画)、及び、バックカメラ64によって撮像されている撮像画像SG4-2’(スルー画)を表している。図16(b)において、前方側変化率は後方側変化率は未満である。図16(c)は、図16(a)の場合における、タッチスクリーン44に表示されている表示画像HG(縦長画像)である。図16(c)の表示画像HGの表示形式は、図14(c)の表示画像HGの表示形式と同一である。 FIG. 16A shows a state in which the user U tilts himself or herself with a casing by a predetermined amount or more from the state of FIG. FIG. 16 (b), in the case of FIG. 16 (a), the captured image being captured by the front camera 62 SG 4-1 (through image), and the imaging is imaged by the back camera 64 images SG 4- 2 '(through image). In FIG. 16B, the front side change rate is less than the rear side change rate. FIG. 16C is a display image HG 4 (vertically long image) displayed on the touch screen 44 in the case of FIG. The display format of the display image HG 4 in FIG. 16C is the same as the display format of the display image HG 4 in FIG.
 即ち、図13のフローチャートにおいて、切替判定部150は、前方側変化率は後方側変化率未満であると判定し(ステップS152:Yes)、切替制限部160は、表示画像の表示形式を切り替えないように、即ち、切り替えをホールドするように制御する(ステップS170)。つまり、図16の如く筐体とともに自身を所定量以上傾斜させた場合には、ユーザUが見易いように、縦長画像を横長画像に切り替えない(又は、図4(c)、(d)に示すように縮小画像に切り替える)。
 なお、表示形式の切替機能はオンに設定され、かつ、ホールド機能はオフに設定されている場合には、表示形式を切り替える。
That is, in the flowchart of FIG. 13, the switching determination unit 150 determines that the forward change rate is less than the backward change rate (step S152: Yes), and the switching restriction unit 160 does not switch the display format of the display image. That is, control is performed to hold the switching (step S170). That is, when the user and the housing are tilted by a predetermined amount or more as shown in FIG. 16, the portrait image is not switched to the landscape image so that the user U can easily see (or shown in FIGS. 4C and 4D). To switch to a reduced image).
When the display format switching function is set to ON and the hold function is set to OFF, the display format is switched.
 なお、図17(a)は、図14(a)の状態から、ユーザUが、自身のみを所定量以上傾斜させた様子を表している。図17(b)は、図17(a)の場合において、フロントカメラ62によって撮像されている撮像画像SG4-1’’(スルー画)、及び、バックカメラ64によって撮像されている撮像画像SG4-2(スルー画)を表している。図17(b)において、前方側変化率は後方側変化率よりも大きい。図17(c)は、図17(a)の場合における、タッチスクリーン44に表示されている表示画像HG(縦長画像)である。図17(c)の表示画像HGの表示形式は、図14(c)の表示画像HGの表示形式と同一である。 FIG. 17A shows a state in which the user U tilts only himself or more from the state of FIG. 14A by a predetermined amount or more. FIG. 17B shows a captured image SG 4-1 ″ (through image) captured by the front camera 62 and a captured image SG captured by the back camera 64 in the case of FIG. 4-2 (through image) is displayed. In FIG. 17B, the front side change rate is larger than the rear side change rate. FIG. 17C is a display image HG 4 (vertically long image) displayed on the touch screen 44 in the case of FIG. The display format of the display image HG 4 in FIG. 17C is the same as the display format of the display image HG 4 in FIG.
 即ち、図13のフローチャートは、上述の如く、筐体が所定量以上傾斜した場合に開始するものであるため、図17の如く自身のみを所定量以上傾斜させた場合には、表示形式は切り替わらない。 That is, since the flowchart of FIG. 13 starts when the casing is tilted by a predetermined amount or more as described above, the display format is switched when only itself is tilted by a predetermined amount or more as shown in FIG. Absent.
 以上、フロントカメラ62による撮像画像に加え、バックカメラ64による撮像画像を利用して表示画像の表示形式を制御する場合であっても、意図しない画面形式の切り替えが生じないため、ユーザの利便性を向上させることができる。また、フロントカメラ62による撮像画像のみを使用する場合に比べ、切替ホールド処理を更に高精度に行える効果がある。また、図5に示したようなユーザが横たわった状態で電子機器4を操作する場合であっても、本実施形態における表示形式の制御によって意図しない画面形式の切り替えが生じないため、ユーザの利便性を向上させることができる。したがって、本実施形態における電子機器4は、ユーザが表示画像を見る際の姿勢の影響を受けることがないため、ユーザにとって視認しやすい方向で表示画像を表示するように表示形式の制御が可能である。 As described above, even when the display format of the display image is controlled using the captured image captured by the back camera 64 in addition to the captured image captured by the front camera 62, the screen format is not changed unintentionally. Can be improved. In addition, there is an effect that the switching hold process can be performed with higher accuracy than when only the image captured by the front camera 62 is used. Further, even when the electronic device 4 is operated with the user lying down as shown in FIG. 5, the display format control according to the present embodiment does not cause unintended screen format switching. Can be improved. Therefore, the electronic device 4 according to the present embodiment is not affected by the posture when the user views the display image, and thus the display format can be controlled so that the display image is displayed in a direction that is easy for the user to visually recognize. is there.
(第2の実施形態)
 次に、図面を参照しながら本発明の第2の実施形態について説明する。図18は、本発明の第2の実施形態による電子機器4が備える表示制御部102内のブロック図の一例である。なお、本発明の第2の実施形態による電子機器4の外観は、本発明の第1の実施形態による電子機器3の外観と同様である。また、電子機器4は、プロセッサ100内に表示制御部100ではなく表示制御部102を有する点が、電子機器3と異なる。
(Second Embodiment)
Next, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 18 is an example of a block diagram in the display control unit 102 included in the electronic device 4 according to the second embodiment of the present invention. The appearance of the electronic device 4 according to the second embodiment of the present invention is the same as the appearance of the electronic device 3 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. The electronic device 4 is different from the electronic device 3 in that the processor 100 includes a display control unit 102 instead of the display control unit 100.
 表示制御部102は、図18に示すように、設定認識部112、傾斜量判定部122、特徴領域抽出部130、変化量算出部140、切替制御部170、及び、設定部192を備える。表示制御部102が備える特徴領域抽出部130及び変化量算出部140は、電子機器3の表示制御部100が備える特徴領域抽出部130及び変化量算出部140と同一であるため、説明の一部又は全部を省略する。 18, the display control unit 102 includes a setting recognition unit 112, an inclination amount determination unit 122, a feature region extraction unit 130, a change amount calculation unit 140, a switching control unit 170, and a setting unit 192. Since the feature region extraction unit 130 and the change amount calculation unit 140 included in the display control unit 102 are the same as the feature region extraction unit 130 and the change amount calculation unit 140 included in the display control unit 100 of the electronic device 3, a part of the description. Or omit all.
 設定部192は、種々の情報を設定する。例えば、表示画像の表示形式の切替機能のオン/オフを設定する。また、設定部192は、表示画像の表示形式の制御機能の1つであるホールド機能のオン/オフを設定する。また、設定部192は、表示画像の表示形式の制御機能の1つである追随機能のオン/オフを設定する。なお、ホールド機能のオン/オフ、及び、追随機能のオン/オフは、表示画像の表示形式の切替機能がオンの場合に参照される。換言すれば、ホールド機能及び追随機能は、表示画像の表示形式の切替機能のサブ機能である。また、設定部192による設定内容は、記憶部30に記憶される。追随機能及び追随機能による追随処理については後述する。 The setting unit 192 sets various information. For example, ON / OFF of a display image display format switching function is set. The setting unit 192 sets on / off of a hold function, which is one of the display image display format control functions. In addition, the setting unit 192 sets on / off of a follow function, which is one of the display image display format control functions. The hold function on / off and the follow function on / off are referred to when the display image display format switching function is on. In other words, the hold function and the follow function are subfunctions of the display image display format switching function. Further, the setting content by the setting unit 192 is stored in the storage unit 30. The following function and the following process by the following function will be described later.
 設定部192は、環境に応じて自動的に、又は、ユーザの指示に従って、表示形式の切替機能のオン/オフ、ホールド機能のオン/オフ、及び、追随機能のオン/オフを設定する。なお、設定部192による、ホールド機能のオン/オフの自動設定、及び、追随機能のオン/オフの自動設定は、電子機器3の設定部190によるホールド機能のオン/オフの自動設定と同様である。 The setting unit 192 sets the display format switching function on / off, the hold function on / off, and the tracking function on / off automatically or according to the user's instruction. The automatic setting of the hold function on / off and the automatic setting of the follow function on / off by the setting unit 192 are the same as the automatic setting of the hold function on / off by the setting unit 190 of the electronic device 3. is there.
 設定認識部112は、記憶部30に記憶されている設定情報(表示画像の表示形式の切替機能のオン/オフの情報、ホールド機能のオン/オフの情報、追随機能のオン/オフの情報)を取得する。例えば、設定認識部112は、傾斜量判定部122からの要求に応じて、記憶部30に記憶されている設定情報を取得し、設定情報を傾斜量判定部122に出力(応答)する。 The setting recognition unit 112 stores setting information stored in the storage unit 30 (display image display format switching function on / off information, hold function on / off information, tracking function on / off information). To get. For example, the setting recognition unit 112 acquires the setting information stored in the storage unit 30 in response to a request from the inclination amount determination unit 122 and outputs (responds) the setting information to the inclination amount determination unit 122.
 傾斜量判定部122は、モーションセンサ50(仰角センサ56)から検出値を取得し、筐体(a casing body、 a body、本体(a body, a main body))の傾斜量を算出する。なお、傾斜量判定部122は、表示形式の切替機能がオンに設定されている場合に、筐体の傾斜量を算出してもよい。 The inclination amount determination unit 122 acquires the detection value from the motion sensor 50 (elevation angle sensor 56), and calculates the inclination amount of the casing (a casing body, a body, main body (a body, a main body)). Note that the tilt amount determination unit 122 may calculate the tilt amount of the housing when the display format switching function is set to ON.
 筐体の傾斜量を算出した傾斜量判定部122は、筐体が所定量(例えば、45度や50度)以上傾斜したか否かを判定する。 The tilt amount determination unit 122 that calculates the tilt amount of the housing determines whether or not the housing is tilted by a predetermined amount (for example, 45 degrees or 50 degrees).
 傾斜量判定部122は、表示形式の切替機能がオフに設定されている場合、何もしない。即ち、表示形式の切替機能がオフに設定されている場合には、表示形式の切り替えは行わないため、傾斜量判定部122は、既に筐体の傾斜量を算出していた場合であっても、何もしない。 The tilt amount determination unit 122 does nothing when the display format switching function is set to OFF. That is, when the display format switching function is set to OFF, the display format is not switched, so that the tilt amount determination unit 122 has already calculated the tilt amount of the housing. ,do nothing.
 傾斜量判定部122は、表示形式の切替機能がオンに設定され、かつ、筐体が所定量以上傾斜したと判定した場合において、ホールド機能がオフに設定されている場合には、筐体の傾斜量、筐体の傾斜方向、及び、筐体の傾斜量に係る判定結果(筐体の傾斜量は所定量以上である旨の判定結果)とともに、ホールド機能がオフに設定されている旨の通知(情報)を切替制御部170に出力する。 When the display format switching function is set to ON and it is determined that the casing is tilted by a predetermined amount or more and the hold function is set to OFF, the tilt amount determination unit 122 Along with the amount of inclination, the direction of inclination of the case, and the result of determination related to the amount of inclination of the case (the result of determination that the amount of inclination of the case is equal to or greater than the predetermined amount) A notification (information) is output to the switching control unit 170.
 傾斜量判定部122は、表示形式の切替機能がオンに設定され、かつ、筐体が所定量以上傾斜したと判定した場合において、ホールド機能がオンに設定されている場合には、筐体の傾斜量、筐体の傾斜方向、及び、筐体の傾斜量に係る判定結果(筐体の傾斜量は所定量以上である旨の判定結果)を特徴領域抽出部130に出力する。 When the display format switching function is set to ON and it is determined that the casing is tilted by a predetermined amount or more and the hold function is set to ON, the tilt amount determination unit 122 A determination result related to the tilt amount, the tilt direction of the housing, and the tilt amount of the housing (determination result that the tilt amount of the housing is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount) is output to the feature region extraction unit 130.
 傾斜量判定部122は、表示形式の切替機能がオンに設定され、かつ、筐体が所定量以上傾斜していないと判定した場合において、追随機能がオフに設定されている場合には、筐体の傾斜量に係る判定結果(筐体の傾斜量は所定量未満である旨の判定結果)とともに、追随機能がオフに設定されている旨の通知(情報)を切替制御部170に出力する。なお、傾斜量判定部122は、当該場合に、何もしなくてもよい。 When the display format switching function is set to ON and it is determined that the casing is not tilted by a predetermined amount or more and the follow function is set to OFF, the tilt amount determination unit 122 A notification (information) indicating that the following function is set to OFF is output to the switching control unit 170 together with a determination result related to the amount of body tilt (a result of determination that the amount of tilt of the housing is less than a predetermined amount). . Note that the tilt amount determination unit 122 does not have to do anything in this case.
 傾斜量判定部122は、表示形式の切替機能がオンに設定され、かつ、筐体が所定量以上傾斜していないと判定した場合において、追随機能がオンに設定されている場合には、筐体の傾斜量、筐体の傾斜方向、及び、筐体の傾斜量に係る判定結果(筐体の傾斜量は所定量未満である旨の判定結果)を特徴領域抽出部130に出力する。 When the display format switching function is set to ON and it is determined that the casing is not tilted by a predetermined amount or more and the follow function is set to ON, the tilt amount determination unit 122 sets the casing. The determination result related to the body tilt amount, the tilt direction of the housing, and the tilt amount of the housing (determination result that the tilt amount of the housing is less than the predetermined amount) is output to the feature region extraction unit 130.
 特徴領域抽出部130は、フロントカメラ62によって撮像された撮像画像をカメラ部60から取得する。例えば、特徴領域抽出部130は、筐体の傾斜量、筐体の傾斜方向、及び、筐体の傾斜量に係る判定結果(筐体の傾斜量は所定量以上である旨の判定結果、又は、筐体の傾斜量は所定量未満である旨の判定結果)を傾斜量判定部122から取得した場合に、筐体の傾斜前後の撮像画像をカメラ部60から取得する。つまり、特徴領域抽出部130は、表示形式の切替機能、及び、ホールド機能がオンに設定され、かつ、筐体が所定量以上傾斜したと判定された場合、又は、表示形式の切替機能、及び、追随機能がオンに設定され、かつ、筐体が所定量以上傾斜していない判定された場合に、筐体の傾斜前後の撮像画像をカメラ部60から取得する。 The feature region extraction unit 130 acquires a captured image captured by the front camera 62 from the camera unit 60. For example, the feature region extraction unit 130 determines a determination result regarding the amount of inclination of the casing, the inclination direction of the casing, and the amount of inclination of the casing (the determination result that the amount of inclination of the casing is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount, or When the inclination amount determination unit 122 acquires a determination result that the amount of inclination of the casing is less than a predetermined amount), the captured images before and after the inclination of the casing are acquired from the camera unit 60. That is, the feature region extraction unit 130 determines that the display format switching function and the hold function are set to ON and the casing is tilted by a predetermined amount or more, or the display format switching function, and When the follow function is set to ON and it is determined that the casing is not tilted by a predetermined amount or more, captured images before and after the tilt of the casing are acquired from the camera unit 60.
 特徴領域抽出部130は、筐体の傾斜前後の撮像画像をカメラ部60から取得した場合、筐体の傾斜前後の夫々の撮像画像から、被写体の特徴部分を抽出する。特徴領域抽出部130は、筐体の傾斜前後の夫々の撮像画像から被写体の特徴部分を抽出できた場合には、傾斜量判定部122から取得した筐体の傾斜量、筐体の傾斜方向、及び、筐体の傾斜量に係る判定結果とともに、傾斜前後の夫々の撮像画像から抽出した被写体の特徴部分を示す情報を変化量算出部140に出力する。 When the captured image before and after the tilt of the housing is acquired from the camera unit 60, the feature area extracting unit 130 extracts the feature portion of the subject from the captured images before and after the tilt of the housing. When the feature region extraction unit 130 can extract the feature portion of the subject from the respective captured images before and after the tilt of the casing, the tilt amount of the casing acquired from the tilt amount determination unit 122, the tilt direction of the casing, And the information which shows the characteristic part of the to-be-photographed object extracted from each captured image before and behind inclination with the determination result regarding the amount of inclination of a housing | casing is output to the variation calculation part 140. FIG.
 一方、特徴領域抽出部130は、筐体の傾斜前の撮像画像、筐体の傾斜後の撮像画像の少なくとも一方から被写体の特徴部分を抽出できなかった場合には、傾斜量判定部122から取得した筐体の傾斜量、筐体の傾斜方向、及び、筐体の傾斜量に係る判定結果とともに、特徴部分を抽出できなかった旨の通知(情報)を切替制御部170に出力する。 On the other hand, the feature region extraction unit 130 obtains from the tilt amount determination unit 122 when the feature portion of the subject cannot be extracted from at least one of the captured image before tilting the housing and the captured image after tilting the housing. A notification (information) indicating that the feature portion could not be extracted is output to the switching control unit 170 together with the determination result relating to the tilt amount of the casing, the tilt direction of the casing, and the tilt amount of the casing.
 変化量算出部140は、筐体の傾斜量、筐体の傾斜方向、筐体の傾斜量に係る判定結果、及び、夫々の撮像画像から抽出した被写体の特徴部分を特徴領域抽出部130から取得した場合には、夫々の撮像画像における当該特徴部分の時間的な変化量を算出する。被写体の特徴部分の時間的な変化量を算出した変化量算出部140は、特徴領域抽出部130から取得した筐体の傾斜量、筐体の傾斜方向、及び、筐体の傾斜量に係る判定結果とともに、特徴部分の時間的な変化量を切替制御部170に出力する。 The change amount calculation unit 140 acquires, from the feature region extraction unit 130, the determination result related to the amount of inclination of the housing, the inclination direction of the housing, the amount of inclination of the housing, and the feature portion of the subject extracted from each captured image. In such a case, the temporal change amount of the feature portion in each captured image is calculated. The change amount calculation unit 140 that calculates the temporal change amount of the feature portion of the subject determines the amount of inclination of the casing, the inclination direction of the casing, and the amount of inclination of the casing acquired from the feature region extraction unit 130. Together with the result, the temporal change amount of the characteristic part is output to the switching control unit 170.
 切替制御部170は、表示画像の表示形式の切り替えを制御する。
 切替制御部170は、筐体の傾斜量、筐体の傾斜方向、筐体の傾斜量に係る判定結果(筐体の傾斜量は所定量以上である旨の判定結果)、及び、ホールド機能がオフに設定されている旨の通知(情報)を傾斜量判定部122から取得した場合、表示形式の切り替えが必要であると判定する。
The switching control unit 170 controls switching of the display format of the display image.
The switching control unit 170 has a determination result related to the amount of inclination of the case, the direction of inclination of the case, the amount of inclination of the case (determination result that the amount of inclination of the case is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount), and a hold function. When a notification (information) indicating that it is set to OFF is acquired from the tilt amount determination unit 122, it is determined that the display format needs to be switched.
 切替制御部170は、筐体の傾斜量に係る判定結果(筐体の傾斜量は所定量未満である旨の判定結果)、及び、追随機能がオフに設定されている旨の通知(情報)を傾斜量判定部122から取得した場合、表示形式の切り替えが不要であると判定する。 The switching control unit 170 determines the determination result related to the tilt amount of the casing (the determination result that the tilt amount of the casing is less than the predetermined amount) and the notification (information) that the following function is set to off. Is obtained from the tilt amount determination unit 122, it is determined that the display format switching is unnecessary.
 切替制御部170は、筐体の傾斜量、筐体の傾斜方向、筐体の傾斜量に係る判定結果(筐体の傾斜量は所定量以上である旨の判定結果)、及び、特徴部分を抽出できなかった旨の通知(情報)を特徴領域抽出部130から取得した場合、表示形式の切り替えが必要であると判定する。 The switching control unit 170 determines the amount of inclination of the housing, the direction of inclination of the housing, the determination result related to the amount of inclination of the housing (the determination result that the amount of inclination of the housing is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount), and the characteristic portion. When a notification (information) indicating that extraction has failed is acquired from the feature region extraction unit 130, it is determined that the display format needs to be switched.
 切替制御部170は、筐体の傾斜量、筐体の傾斜方向、筐体の傾斜量に係る判定結果(筐体の傾斜量は所定量未満である旨の判定結果)、及び、特徴部分を抽出できなかった旨の通知(情報)を特徴領域抽出部130から取得した場合、表示形式の切り替えが不要であると判定する。 The switching control unit 170 displays the determination result related to the amount of inclination of the housing, the direction of inclination of the housing, the amount of inclination of the housing (the determination result that the amount of inclination of the housing is less than a predetermined amount), and the characteristic portion. When a notification (information) indicating that extraction has failed is acquired from the feature region extraction unit 130, it is determined that display format switching is unnecessary.
 切替制御部170は、筐体の傾斜量、筐体の傾斜方向、筐体の傾斜量に係る判定結果(筐体の傾斜量は所定量以上である旨の判定結果、又は、筐体の傾斜量は所定量未満である旨の判定結果)、及び、特徴部分の時間的な変化量を変化量算出部140から取得した場合には、特徴部分の時間的な変化量と第1の閾値又は第2の閾値とを比較し、特徴部分の変化量に係る比較結果と筐体の傾斜量に係る判定結果とに基づいて、表示画像の表示形式の切り替えの要否を判定する。 The switching control unit 170 determines the determination result related to the amount of inclination of the case, the inclination direction of the case, and the amount of inclination of the case (the determination result that the amount of inclination of the case is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount, or the case The determination result that the amount is less than the predetermined amount) and the temporal change amount of the feature portion from the change amount calculation unit 140, the temporal change amount of the feature portion and the first threshold value or The second threshold value is compared, and whether or not it is necessary to switch the display format of the display image is determined based on the comparison result relating to the change amount of the characteristic portion and the determination result relating to the inclination amount of the housing.
(筐体の傾斜量は所定量以上である旨の判定結果を取得している場合)
 切替制御部170は、被写体の特徴部分の時間的な変化量が第1の閾値以上である場合、表示形式の切り替えが必要であると判定し、被写体の特徴部分の時間的な変化量が第1の閾値未満である場合には、表示画像の表示形式の切り替えが不要であると判定する。
 つまり、筐体が所定量以上傾斜したと判定された場合であって、ホールド機能がオンに設定されている場合において、被写体の特徴部分の時間的な変化量が第1の閾値以上であるときは、切替制御部170は、表示形式の切り替えが必要(換言すれば、ホールド処理が不要)であると判定し、被写体の特徴部分の時間的な変化量が第1の閾値未満である場合には、切替制御部170は、表示画像の表示形式の切り替えが不要(換言すれば、ホールド処理が必要)であると判定する。
(When the determination result that the amount of inclination of the case is equal to or greater than the predetermined amount has been acquired)
When the temporal change amount of the feature portion of the subject is equal to or greater than the first threshold, the switching control unit 170 determines that the display format needs to be switched, and the temporal change amount of the feature portion of the subject is the first. When it is less than the threshold value of 1, it is determined that it is not necessary to switch the display format of the display image.
That is, when it is determined that the housing is tilted by a predetermined amount or more and the hold function is set to ON, the temporal change amount of the feature portion of the subject is equal to or greater than the first threshold value The switching control unit 170 determines that the display format needs to be switched (in other words, the hold process is unnecessary), and the temporal change amount of the feature portion of the subject is less than the first threshold value. The switching control unit 170 determines that switching of the display format of the display image is unnecessary (in other words, hold processing is necessary).
 なお、被写体の特徴部分の時間的な変化量と比較する第1の閾値は、第1の実施形態と同様、ユーザが、筐体を回転させるなどして筐体を傾斜させる際に、当該ユーザが筐体の傾斜に伴って(連動して)自身の顔(例えば両目を結ぶ直線)を意図的に傾斜させたか否かを判定するための値である。 The first threshold value to be compared with the temporal change amount of the characteristic portion of the subject is the same as that in the first embodiment when the user tilts the housing by rotating the housing. Is a value for determining whether or not the user's own face (for example, a straight line connecting both eyes) is intentionally tilted with (in conjunction with) the tilt of the housing.
(筐体の傾斜量は所定量未満である旨の判定結果を取得している場合)
 切替制御部170は、特徴部分の時間的な変化量が第2の閾値以上である場合、表示形式の切り替えが必要であると判定し、特徴部分の時間的な変化量が第2の閾値未満である場合には、表示画像の表示形式の切り替えが不要であると判定する。
 つまり、筐体が所定量以上傾斜していないと判定された場合であって、追随機能がオンに設定されている場合において、被写体の特徴部分の時間的な変化量が第2の閾値以上であるときは、切替制御部170は、表示形式の切り替えが必要(換言すれば、追随処理が必要)であると判定し、被写体の特徴部分の時間的な変化量が第2の閾値未満である場合には、切替制御部170は、表示画像の表示形式の切り替えが不要(換言すれば、追随処理が不要)であると判定する。
(When the judgment result that the amount of inclination of the case is less than the predetermined amount is acquired)
When the temporal change amount of the feature portion is equal to or greater than the second threshold value, the switching control unit 170 determines that the display format needs to be switched, and the temporal change amount of the feature portion is less than the second threshold value. If it is, it is determined that it is not necessary to switch the display format of the display image.
That is, when it is determined that the casing is not inclined more than the predetermined amount and the follow function is set to ON, the temporal change amount of the feature portion of the subject is equal to or larger than the second threshold value. In some cases, the switching control unit 170 determines that the display format needs to be switched (in other words, the tracking process is necessary), and the temporal change amount of the feature portion of the subject is less than the second threshold value. In this case, the switching control unit 170 determines that switching of the display format of the display image is unnecessary (in other words, no follow-up process is required).
 なお、被写体の特徴部分の時間的な変化量と比較する第2の閾値は、ユーザが、筐体を回転させるなどして筐体を傾斜させていないときに、当該ユーザが自身の顔(例えば両目を結ぶ直線)を意図的に傾斜させたか否かを判定するための値である。
 筐体を傾斜させていないときに自身の顔を意図的に傾斜させている例は、例えば、図5(c)に示すような場合である。図5(c)の場合、被写体の特徴部分の変化量は60度となる。以上から、例えば、第2の閾値は、45度前後の角度としてもよい。
 例えば、第2の閾値を50度とした場合、ユーザが、筐体を傾斜させないで顔のみを50度以上傾斜させた場合、変化量は第2の閾値以上となるため、追随処理が働く。
Note that the second threshold value to be compared with the temporal change amount of the characteristic part of the subject is that when the user does not tilt the case by rotating the case, the user has his face (for example, This is a value for determining whether or not the straight line connecting both eyes is intentionally inclined.
An example in which the user's face is intentionally inclined when the casing is not inclined is, for example, a case as shown in FIG. In the case of FIG. 5C, the amount of change in the characteristic portion of the subject is 60 degrees. From the above, for example, the second threshold value may be an angle of around 45 degrees.
For example, when the second threshold is set to 50 degrees, when the user tilts only the face by 50 degrees or more without tilting the housing, the amount of change is equal to or greater than the second threshold, and the follow-up process works.
 切替制御部170は、表示形式の切り替えが不要であると判定した場合には、表示形式を維持する旨の通知(情報)を切替処理部180に出力する。また、切替制御部170は、表示形式の切り替えが必要であると判定した場合には、筐体の傾斜量、及び、筐体の傾斜方向を切替処理部180に出力する。 When the switching control unit 170 determines that switching of the display format is not necessary, the switching control unit 170 outputs a notification (information) to the effect that the display format is maintained to the switching processing unit 180. If the switching control unit 170 determines that the display format needs to be switched, the switching control unit 170 outputs the amount of inclination of the housing and the direction of inclination of the housing to the switching processing unit 180.
 切替処理部180は、表示形式を維持する旨の通知(情報)を切替制御部170から取得した場合、表示画像の表示形式を切り替えないように制御する(例えば、何もしない)。また、切替処理部180は、筐体の傾斜量、及び、筐体の傾斜方向を切替制御部170から取得した場合、筐体の傾斜量、及び、筐体の傾斜方向に応じて表示画像の表示形式を切り替えるように制御する。 When the notification (information) indicating that the display format is maintained is acquired from the switching control unit 170, the switching processing unit 180 performs control so that the display format of the display image is not switched (for example, nothing is performed). In addition, when the switching processing unit 180 acquires the tilt amount of the casing and the tilt direction of the casing from the switching control unit 170, the switching processing unit 180 displays the display image according to the tilt amount of the casing and the tilt direction of the casing. Control to switch the display format.
 以上のように、表示制御部102は、筐体が所定量以上傾斜したと判定された場合であって、表示形式の切替機能、及び、ホールド機能がオンに設定されている場合には、被写体の特徴部分の時間的な変化量に応じて、タッチスクリーン44における表示画像の表示形式を選択的に切り替える。
 また、表示制御部102は、筐体が所定量以上傾斜していないと判定された場合であって、表示形式の切替機能、及び、追随機能がオンに設定されている場合には、被写体の特徴部分の時間的な変化量に応じて、タッチスクリーン44における表示画像の表示形式を選択的に切り替える。
As described above, the display control unit 102 determines that the case is tilted by a predetermined amount or more, and if the display format switching function and the hold function are set to ON, the subject The display format of the display image on the touch screen 44 is selectively switched in accordance with the temporal change amount of the feature portion.
In addition, the display control unit 102 determines that the case is not tilted by a predetermined amount or more, and if the display format switching function and the follow function are set to ON, the display control unit 102 The display format of the display image on the touch screen 44 is selectively switched according to the temporal change amount of the characteristic portion.
 図19は、電子機器4における表示形式の制御処理の流れを示すフローチャートの一例である。図19のフローチャートは、表示形式の切替機能がオンに設定されている場合において、筐体が傾斜(所定量以上でなくてもよい)したときに開始する。 FIG. 19 is an example of a flowchart showing the flow of display format control processing in the electronic device 4. The flowchart in FIG. 19 starts when the housing is tilted (it may not be a predetermined amount or more) when the display format switching function is set to ON.
 図19において、傾斜量判定部122は、筐体が所定量以上傾斜したか否かを判定する(ステップS200)。ステップS200において筐体が所定量以上傾斜したと判定された場合、下記ステップS210~ステップS270を実行する。ステップS200において筐体が所定量以上傾斜していないと判定された場合、下記ステップS310~ステップS370を実行する。 In FIG. 19, the tilt amount determination unit 122 determines whether or not the housing is tilted by a predetermined amount or more (step S200). If it is determined in step S200 that the casing is tilted by a predetermined amount or more, the following steps S210 to S270 are executed. If it is determined in step S200 that the housing is not inclined more than the predetermined amount, the following steps S310 to S370 are executed.
(S210~ステップS270)
 ステップS200において筐体が所定量以上傾斜したと判定された場合(ステップS200:Yes)、設定認識部112(又は傾斜量判定部122)は、記憶部30を参照し、ホールド機能がオンである否かを判断する(ステップS210)。
(S210 to step S270)
When it is determined in step S200 that the housing is tilted by a predetermined amount or more (step S200: Yes), the setting recognition unit 112 (or the tilt amount determination unit 122) refers to the storage unit 30 and the hold function is on. It is determined whether or not (step S210).
 ステップS210においてホールド機能がオンである場合(ステップS210:Yes)、傾斜量判定部122は、筐体の傾斜量、筐体の傾斜方向、及び、筐体の傾斜量に係る判定結果(筐体の傾斜量は所定量以上である旨の判定結果)を特徴領域抽出部130に出力する。次いで、特徴領域抽出部130は、筐体の傾斜前後の撮像画像の夫々から被写体の特徴部分の抽出を試みて(ステップS220)、夫々から被写体の特徴部分を抽出できたか否かを判断する(ステップS230)。 When the hold function is turned on in step S210 (step S210: Yes), the tilt amount determination unit 122 determines the determination result (the case of the tilt amount of the casing, the tilt direction of the casing, and the tilt amount of the casing). Is output to the feature area extraction unit 130. Next, the feature region extraction unit 130 tries to extract the feature portion of the subject from each of the captured images before and after the inclination of the casing (step S220), and determines whether the feature portion of the subject has been extracted from each of them (step S220) Step S230).
 ステップS230において、夫々から被写体の特徴部分を抽出できた場合には(ステップS230:Yes)、特徴領域抽出部130は、筐体の傾斜量、筐体の傾斜方向、及び、筐体の傾斜量に係る判定結果(筐体の傾斜量は所定量以上である旨の判定結果)とともに、被写体の特徴部分を示す情報を変化量算出部140に出力する。次いで、変化量算出部140は、被写体の特徴部分の時間的な変化量を算出し(ステップS240)、算出した変化量を、筐体の傾斜量、筐体の傾斜方向、及び、筐体の傾斜量に係る判定結果とともに、切替制御部170に出力する。次いで、切替制御部170は、被写体の特徴部分の時間的な変化量が第1の閾値以上であるか否かを判定する(ステップS250)。 In step S230, when the feature portion of the subject can be extracted from each of them (step S230: Yes), the feature region extraction unit 130 determines the amount of inclination of the housing, the direction of inclination of the housing, and the amount of inclination of the housing. Together with the determination result (determination result indicating that the amount of inclination of the housing is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount), information indicating the characteristic part of the subject is output to the change amount calculation unit 140. Next, the change amount calculation unit 140 calculates a temporal change amount of the characteristic portion of the subject (step S240), and the calculated change amount is calculated based on the inclination amount of the casing, the inclination direction of the casing, and the It outputs to the switching control part 170 with the determination result which concerns on the amount of inclinations. Next, the switching control unit 170 determines whether or not the temporal change amount of the feature portion of the subject is greater than or equal to the first threshold (step S250).
 ステップS250において、被写体の特徴部分の時間的な変化量が第1の閾値未満であると判定した場合(ステップS250:No)、切替制御部170は、表示画像の表示形式の切り替えが不要であると判定し、表示形式を維持する旨の通知(情報)を切替処理部180に出力する。表示形式を維持する旨の通知(情報)を取得した切替処理部180は、現在の表示形式をホールドする(何もしない)(ステップS270)。そして、本フローチャートは終了する。なお、ステップS270の矩形が破線であるのは、切替処理部180が、何もしなくてもよい旨を表している。 If it is determined in step S250 that the temporal change amount of the characteristic portion of the subject is less than the first threshold (step S250: No), the switching control unit 170 does not need to switch the display format of the display image. And a notification (information) to maintain the display format is output to the switching processing unit 180. The switching processing unit 180 that has acquired the notification (information) to maintain the display format holds the current display format (does nothing) (step S270). Then, this flowchart ends. Note that the rectangle in step S270 is a broken line indicates that the switching processing unit 180 does not have to do anything.
 ステップS210においてホールド機能がオンでない場合(ステップS210:No)、傾斜量判定部122は、筐体の傾斜量、筐体の傾斜方向、及び、筐体の傾斜量に係る判定結果(筐体の傾斜量は所定量以上である旨の判定結果)とともに、ホールド機能がオフに設定されている旨の通知(情報)を切替制御部170に出力する。筐体の傾斜量、筐体の傾斜方向、及び、筐体の傾斜量に係る判定結果とともに、ホールド機能がオフに設定されている旨の通知(情報)を取得した切替制御部170は、表示形式の切り替えが必要であると判定し、筐体の傾斜量、及び、筐体の傾斜方向を切替処理部180に出力する。筐体の傾斜量、及び、筐体の傾斜方向を取得した切替処理部180は、筐体の傾斜量、及び、筐体の傾斜方向に応じて表示画像の表示形式を切り替えるように制御する(ステップS260)。そして、本フローチャートは終了する。 When the hold function is not turned on in step S210 (step S210: No), the tilt amount determination unit 122 determines the determination result (the casing's tilt amount, the tilt direction of the casing, and the tilt amount of the casing). A determination result indicating that the tilt amount is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount) and a notification (information) indicating that the hold function is set to OFF are output to the switching control unit 170. The switching control unit 170 that has acquired the notification (information) that the hold function is set to OFF together with the determination result related to the tilt amount of the housing, the tilt direction of the housing, and the tilt amount of the housing It is determined that it is necessary to switch the format, and the amount of inclination of the casing and the inclination direction of the casing are output to the switching processing unit 180. The switching processing unit 180 that acquires the tilt amount of the housing and the tilt direction of the housing controls the display image display format to be switched according to the tilt amount of the housing and the tilt direction of the housing ( Step S260). Then, this flowchart ends.
 ステップS230において、筐体の傾斜前後の撮像画像の少なくとも一方から被写体の特徴部分を抽出できなかった場合には(ステップS230:No)、特徴領域抽出部130は、筐体の傾斜量、筐体の傾斜方向、及び、筐体の傾斜量に係る判定結果(筐体の傾斜量は所定量以上である旨の判定結果)とともに、特徴部分を抽出できなかった旨の通知(情報)を切替制御部170に出力する。筐体の傾斜量、筐体の傾斜方向、及び、筐体の傾斜量に係る判定結果とともに、特徴部分を抽出できなかった旨の通知(情報)を取得した切替制御部170は、表示形式の切り替えが必要であると判定し、筐体の傾斜量、及び、筐体の傾斜方向を切替処理部180に出力する。以下、ステップS210(No)の場合と同様の処理を行って、本フローチャートは終了する。 In step S230, when the feature portion of the subject cannot be extracted from at least one of the captured images before and after the tilt of the casing (step S230: No), the feature region extraction unit 130 determines the tilt amount of the casing, the casing Switch the notification (information) that the feature portion could not be extracted, together with the determination result related to the inclination direction of the case and the determination result related to the amount of inclination of the case (determination result that the amount of inclination of the case is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount) Output to the unit 170. The switching control unit 170 that has acquired the notification (information) that the feature portion could not be extracted together with the determination result related to the tilt amount of the housing, the tilt direction of the housing, and the tilt amount of the housing, It is determined that switching is necessary, and the amount of inclination of the casing and the direction of inclination of the casing are output to the switching processing unit 180. Thereafter, the same processing as that in the case of step S210 (No) is performed, and this flowchart ends.
 ステップS250において、被写体の特徴部分の時間的な変化量が第1の閾値以上であると判定した場合には(ステップS250:Yes)、切替制御部170は、表示画像の表示形式の切り替えが必要であると判定し、筐体の傾斜量、及び、筐体の傾斜方向を切替処理部180に出力する。以下、ステップS210(No)の場合と同様の処理を行って、本フローチャートは終了する。 If it is determined in step S250 that the temporal change amount of the characteristic portion of the subject is equal to or greater than the first threshold (step S250: Yes), the switching control unit 170 needs to switch the display format of the display image. And the inclination amount of the casing and the inclination direction of the casing are output to the switching processing unit 180. Thereafter, the same processing as that in the case of step S210 (No) is performed, and this flowchart ends.
(S310~ステップS370)
 ステップS200において筐体が所定量以上傾斜していないと判定された場合(ステップS200:No)、設定認識部112(又は傾斜量判定部122)は、記憶部30を参照し、追随機能がオンである否かを判断する(ステップS310)。
(S310 to step S370)
When it is determined in step S200 that the casing is not inclined more than a predetermined amount (step S200: No), the setting recognition unit 112 (or the inclination amount determination unit 122) refers to the storage unit 30 and the follow function is turned on. Is determined (step S310).
 ステップS310において追随機能がオンである場合(ステップS310:Yes)、傾斜量判定部122は、筐体の傾斜量、筐体の傾斜方向、及び、筐体の傾斜量に係る判定結果(筐体の傾斜量は所定量未満である旨の判定結果)を特徴領域抽出部130に出力する。次いで、特徴領域抽出部130は、筐体の傾斜前後の撮像画像の夫々から被写体の特徴部分の抽出を試みて(ステップS320)、夫々から被写体の特徴部分を抽出できたか否かを判断する(ステップS330)。 When the follow function is on in step S310 (step S310: Yes), the tilt amount determination unit 122 determines the determination result regarding the tilt amount of the casing, the tilt direction of the casing, and the tilt amount of the casing (the casing). Is output to the feature region extraction unit 130 as a result of determination that the inclination amount is less than a predetermined amount. Next, the feature region extraction unit 130 tries to extract the feature portion of the subject from each of the captured images before and after the inclination of the casing (step S320), and determines whether the feature portion of the subject has been extracted from each of them (step S320). Step S330).
 ステップS330において、夫々から被写体の特徴部分を抽出できた場合には(ステップS330:Yes)、特徴領域抽出部130は、筐体の傾斜量、筐体の傾斜方向、及び、筐体の傾斜量に係る判定結果(筐体の傾斜量は所定量未満である旨の判定結果)とともに、被写体の特徴部分を示す情報を変化量算出部140に出力する。次いで、変化量算出部140は、被写体の特徴部分の時間的な変化量を算出し(ステップS340)、算出した変化量を、筐体の傾斜量、筐体の傾斜方向、及び、筐体の傾斜量に係る判定結果とともに、切替制御部170に出力する。次いで、切替制御部170は、被写体の特徴部分の時間的な変化量が第2の閾値以上であるか否かを判定する(ステップS350)。 In step S330, when the feature portion of the subject can be extracted from each of them (step S330: Yes), the feature region extraction unit 130 determines the tilt amount of the casing, the tilt direction of the casing, and the tilt amount of the casing. Together with the determination result (determination result that the amount of inclination of the housing is less than the predetermined amount) and information indicating the characteristic part of the subject are output to the change amount calculation unit 140. Next, the change amount calculation unit 140 calculates a temporal change amount of the characteristic portion of the subject (step S340), and uses the calculated change amount as a tilt amount of the casing, a tilt direction of the casing, It outputs to the switching control part 170 with the determination result which concerns on the amount of inclinations. Next, the switching control unit 170 determines whether or not the temporal change amount of the feature portion of the subject is equal to or greater than the second threshold (step S350).
 ステップS350において、被写体の特徴部分の時間的な変化量が第2の閾値以上であると判定した場合(ステップS350:Yes)、切替制御部170は、表示画像の表示形式の切り替えが必要であると判定し、筐体の傾斜量、及び、筐体の傾斜方向を切替処理部180に出力する。筐体の傾斜量、及び、筐体の傾斜方向を取得した切替処理部180は、筐体の傾斜量、及び、筐体の傾斜方向に応じて表示画像の表示形式を切り替えるように制御する(ステップS360)。例えば、切替処理部180は、筐体の傾斜量、及び、筐体の傾斜方向に基づいて、表示形式(切替後の表示形式)を決定し、決定した表示形式をタッチスクリーンコントローラ42に出力する。そして、本フローチャートは終了する。 If it is determined in step S350 that the temporal change amount of the feature portion of the subject is equal to or greater than the second threshold (step S350: Yes), the switching control unit 170 needs to switch the display format of the display image. And the tilt amount of the casing and the tilt direction of the casing are output to the switching processing unit 180. The switching processing unit 180 that acquires the tilt amount of the housing and the tilt direction of the housing controls the display image display format to be switched according to the tilt amount of the housing and the tilt direction of the housing ( Step S360). For example, the switching processing unit 180 determines a display format (display format after switching) based on the tilt amount of the housing and the tilt direction of the housing, and outputs the determined display format to the touch screen controller 42. . Then, this flowchart ends.
 ステップS310において追随機能がオンでない場合(ステップS310:No)、傾斜量判定部122は、筐体の傾斜量、筐体の傾斜方向、及び、筐体の傾斜量に係る判定結果(筐体の傾斜量は所定量未満である旨の判定結果)とともに、追随機能がオフに設定されている旨の通知(情報)を切替制御部170に出力する。筐体の傾斜量、筐体の傾斜方向、及び、筐体の傾斜量に係る判定結果とともに、追随機能がオフに設定されている旨の通知(情報)を取得した切替制御部170は、表示形式の切り替えが不要であると判定し、表示形式を維持する旨の通知を切替処理部180に出力する。表示形式を維持する旨の通知(情報)を取得した切替処理部180は、何もしない(ステップS370)。そして、本フローチャートは終了する。なお、ステップS370の矩形が破線であるのは、切替処理部180が、何もしなくてもよい旨を表している。 When the follow function is not turned on in step S310 (step S310: No), the tilt amount determination unit 122 determines the determination result regarding the tilt amount of the housing, the tilt direction of the housing, and the tilt amount of the housing (for the housing). A determination result indicating that the inclination amount is less than the predetermined amount) and a notification (information) indicating that the following function is set to OFF are output to the switching control unit 170. The switching control unit 170 that has acquired the notification (information) that the follow function is set to OFF together with the determination result related to the tilt amount of the casing, the tilt direction of the casing, and the tilt amount of the casing, It is determined that switching of the format is unnecessary, and a notification that the display format is maintained is output to the switching processing unit 180. The switching processing unit 180 that has acquired the notification (information) to maintain the display format does nothing (step S370). Then, this flowchart ends. Note that the rectangle in step S370 is a broken line, indicating that the switching processing unit 180 does not have to do anything.
 ステップS330において、筐体の傾斜前後の撮像画像の少なくとも一方から被写体の特徴部分を抽出できなかった場合には(ステップS330:No)、特徴領域抽出部130は、筐体の傾斜量、筐体の傾斜方向、及び、筐体の傾斜量に係る判定結果(筐体の傾斜量は所定量未満である旨の判定結果)とともに、特徴部分を抽出できなかった旨の通知(情報)を切替制御部170に出力する。筐体の傾斜量、筐体の傾斜方向、及び、筐体の傾斜量に係る判定結果とともに、特徴部分を抽出できなかった旨の通知(情報)を取得した切替制御部170は、表示形式の切り替えが不要であると判定し、表示形式を維持する旨の通知(情報)を切替処理部180に出力する。以下、ステップS310(No)の場合と同様の処理を行って、本フローチャートは終了する。 In step S330, when the feature portion of the subject cannot be extracted from at least one of the captured images before and after the tilt of the casing (step S330: No), the feature region extraction unit 130 determines the tilt amount of the casing, the casing Switch the notification (information) that the feature portion could not be extracted, together with the determination result regarding the inclination direction of the case and the determination result related to the amount of inclination of the case (determination result that the amount of inclination of the case is less than the predetermined amount) Output to the unit 170. The switching control unit 170 that has acquired the notification (information) that the feature portion could not be extracted together with the determination result related to the tilt amount of the housing, the tilt direction of the housing, and the tilt amount of the housing, It is determined that switching is not necessary, and a notification (information) to maintain the display format is output to the switching processing unit 180. Thereafter, the same processing as in the case of step S310 (No) is performed, and this flowchart is ended.
 ステップS350において、被写体の特徴部分の時間的な変化量が第2の閾値未満であると判定した場合には(ステップS350:No)、切替制御部170は、表示画像の表示形式の切り替えが不要であると判定し、表示形式を維持する旨の通知(情報)を切替処理部180に出力する。以下、ステップS310(No)の場合と同様の処理を行って、本フローチャートは終了する。なお、図19のステップS270において、後述の図20におけるステップS222~ステップS270の処理を入れてもよい。 If it is determined in step S350 that the temporal change amount of the characteristic portion of the subject is less than the second threshold (step S350: No), the switching control unit 170 does not need to switch the display format of the display image. And a notification (information) to maintain the display format is output to the switching processing unit 180. Thereafter, the same processing as in the case of step S310 (No) is performed, and this flowchart is ended. In step S270 in FIG. 19, processing in steps S222 to S270 in FIG. 20 described later may be included.
 なお、電子機器4は、電子機器3と同様、フロントカメラ62による撮像画像に加え、タッチスクリーン44の後方側の被写体を撮像するバックカメラ64(第2撮像部)による撮像画像を利用して、表示画像の表示形式を制御してもよい。 The electronic device 4 uses the image captured by the back camera 64 (second image capturing unit) that captures the subject on the rear side of the touch screen 44, in addition to the image captured by the front camera 62, similarly to the electronic device 3. The display format of the display image may be controlled.
 以下、ホールド機能に関しては本発明の第1の実施形態による電子機器3と同様であるため、追随機能に関して説明する。表示制御部102は、所定量以上傾斜していない場合に、前方側変化率と後方側変化率とを算出し、前方側変化率が後方側変化率以上であるときは、表示画像の表示形式を変えないように制御し、前方側変化率が後方側変化率未満であるときは、表示画像の表示形式を変えるように制御する。 Hereinafter, since the hold function is the same as that of the electronic apparatus 3 according to the first embodiment of the present invention, the following function will be described. The display control unit 102 calculates the front side change rate and the rear side change rate when it is not inclined by a predetermined amount or more, and when the front side change rate is equal to or higher than the rear side change rate, the display format of the display image If the front side change rate is less than the rear side change rate, control is performed to change the display format of the display image.
 例えば、表示制御部102は、筐体が所定量以上傾斜していない場合であって追随機能がオンに設定(表示形式の切替機能もオンに設定)されている場合は、前方側変化率と後方側変化率とを算出し、前方側変化率が後方側変化率以上であるときは、表示画像の表示形式を変えないように制御し、前方側変化率が後方側変化率未満であるときは、表示画像の表示形式を変えるように制御する。
 一方、表示制御部102は、筐体が所定量以上傾斜していない場合であって追随機能がオフ(表示形式の切替機能はオンに設定)に設定されている場合は、表示画像の表示形式を変えないように制御する
For example, when the case is not tilted by a predetermined amount or more and the follow function is set to ON (the display format switching function is also set to ON), the display control unit 102 When the rear side change rate is calculated and the front side change rate is equal to or greater than the rear side change rate, control is performed so as not to change the display format of the display image, and the front side change rate is less than the rear side change rate. Controls to change the display format of the display image.
On the other hand, the display control unit 102 displays the display format of the display image when the follower function is set to off (the display format switching function is set to on) when the casing is not inclined more than a predetermined amount. Control so as not to change
 図20は、電子機器4における表示形式の制御処理の他の例を示すフローチャートである。例えば、図20は、フロントカメラ62による撮像画像に加え、バックカメラ64による撮像画像を利用して表示画像の表示形式を制御する態様における、処理の流れを表している。なお、図20のフローチャートは、図19のフローチャートと同様、表示形式の切替機能がオンに設定されている場合において、筐体が傾斜(所定量以上でなくてもよい)したときに開始する。なお、図19と同一のステップ番号は、図18と同一の処理である。 FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing another example of display format control processing in the electronic apparatus 4. For example, FIG. 20 illustrates a processing flow in a mode in which the display format of the display image is controlled using the image captured by the back camera 64 in addition to the image captured by the front camera 62. Note that the flowchart in FIG. 20 starts when the casing is tilted (it may not be a predetermined amount or more) when the display format switching function is set to ON, as in the flowchart in FIG. Note that the same step numbers as in FIG. 19 are the same processes as in FIG.
 図20において、傾斜量判定部122は、筐体が所定量以上傾斜したか否かを判定する(ステップS200)。ステップS200において筐体が所定量以上傾斜したと判定された場合、下記ステップS210~ステップS270を実行する。ステップS200において筐体が所定量以上傾斜していないと判定された場合、下記ステップS310~ステップS370を実行する。 In FIG. 20, the tilt amount determination unit 122 determines whether or not the casing is tilted by a predetermined amount or more (step S200). If it is determined in step S200 that the casing is tilted by a predetermined amount or more, the following steps S210 to S270 are executed. If it is determined in step S200 that the housing is not inclined more than the predetermined amount, the following steps S310 to S370 are executed.
(S210~ステップS270)
 ステップS200において筐体が所定量以上傾斜したと判定された場合(ステップS200:Yes)、設定認識部112(又は傾斜量判定部122)は、ホールド機能がオンである否かを判断する(ステップS210)。
(S210 to step S270)
When it is determined in step S200 that the housing is tilted by a predetermined amount or more (step S200: Yes), the setting recognition unit 112 (or the tilt amount determination unit 122) determines whether or not the hold function is on (step). S210).
 ステップS210においてホールド機能がオンである場合(ステップS210:Yes)、傾斜量判定部122は、筐体の傾斜量、筐体の傾斜方向、及び、筐体の傾斜量に係る判定結果(筐体の傾斜量は所定量以上である旨の判定結果)を特徴領域抽出部130に出力する。次いで、特徴領域抽出部130は、両撮像画像(フロントカメラ62による撮像画像及びバックカメラ64による撮像画像)における傾斜前後の撮像画像の夫々(筐体の傾斜前のフロントカメラ62による撮像画像、筐体の傾斜前のバックカメラ64による撮像画像、筐体の傾斜後のフロントカメラ62による撮像画像、筐体の傾斜後のバックカメラ64による撮像画像)から被写体の特徴部分の抽出を試みて(ステップS222)、夫々の撮像画像から、被写体の特徴部分を抽出できたか否かを判断する(ステップS232)。 When the hold function is turned on in step S210 (step S210: Yes), the tilt amount determination unit 122 determines the determination result (the case of the tilt amount of the casing, the tilt direction of the casing, and the tilt amount of the casing). Is output to the feature area extraction unit 130. Next, the feature region extraction unit 130 (images taken by the front camera 62 before the tilt of the housing, images of the housing before and after the tilt of the housing) in each of the captured images (the images taken by the front camera 62 and the images taken by the back camera 64). Attempt to extract the characteristic part of the subject from the image captured by the back camera 64 before tilting the body, the image captured by the front camera 62 after tilting the casing, and the image captured by the back camera 64 after tilting the casing (step) In step S222, it is determined whether or not the feature portion of the subject has been extracted from each captured image (step S232).
 ステップS232において、両撮像画像における傾斜前後の撮像画像の夫々から被写体の特徴部分を抽出できた場合には(ステップS232:Yes)、特徴領域抽出部130は、筐体の傾斜量、筐体の傾斜方向、及び、筐体の傾斜量に係る判定結果(筐体の傾斜量は所定量以上である旨の判定結果)とともに、被写体の特徴部分を示す情報を変化量算出部140に出力する。次いで、変化量算出部140は、両撮像画像における被写体の特徴部分の時間的な変化率(前方側変化率及び後方側変化率)を算出し(ステップS242)。算出した変化率を、筐体の傾斜量、筐体の傾斜方向、及び、筐体の傾斜量に係る判定結果(筐体の傾斜量は所定量以上である旨の判定結果)とともに、切替制御部170に出力する。次いで、切替制御部170は、前方側変化率が後方側変化率未満であるか否かを判定する(ステップS252)。 In step S232, when the feature portion of the subject can be extracted from each of the captured images before and after the inclination in both captured images (step S232: Yes), the feature region extraction unit 130 determines the amount of inclination of the casing, Information indicating the characteristic part of the subject is output to the change amount calculation unit 140 together with the determination result related to the tilt direction and the tilt amount of the casing (the determination result that the tilt amount of the casing is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount). Next, the change amount calculation unit 140 calculates a temporal change rate (a front side change rate and a rear side change rate) of the characteristic portion of the subject in both captured images (step S242). Switch control of the calculated rate of change together with a determination result related to the tilt amount of the housing, the tilt direction of the housing, and the tilt amount of the housing (a determination result that the tilt amount of the housing is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount). Output to the unit 170. Next, the switching control unit 170 determines whether or not the front side change rate is less than the rear side change rate (step S252).
 ステップS252において、前方側変化率が後方側変化率未満である場合(ステップS152:Yes)、切替制御部170は、表示画像の表示形式の切り替えが不要であると判定し、表示形式を維持する旨の通知(情報)を切替処理部180に出力する。表示形式を維持する旨の通知(情報)を取得した切替処理部180は、現在の表示形式をホールドする(何もしない)(ステップS270)。そして、本フローチャートは終了する。 In step S252, when the forward change rate is less than the backward change rate (step S152: Yes), the switching control unit 170 determines that switching of the display format of the display image is unnecessary, and maintains the display format. A notification (information) to that effect is output to the switching processing unit 180. The switching processing unit 180 that has acquired the notification (information) to maintain the display format holds the current display format (does nothing) (step S270). Then, this flowchart ends.
 ステップS210においてホールド機能がオンでない場合(ステップS210:No)、傾斜量判定部122は、筐体の傾斜量、筐体の傾斜方向、及び、筐体の傾斜量に係る判定結果(筐体の傾斜量は所定量以上である旨の判定結果)とともに、ホールド機能がオフに設定されている旨の通知(情報)を切替制御部170に出力する。次いで、切替制御部170は、表示形式の切り替えが必要であると判定し、筐体の傾斜量、及び、筐体の傾斜方向を切替処理部180に出力する。筐体の傾斜量、及び、筐体の傾斜方向を取得した切替処理部180は、筐体の傾斜量、及び、筐体の傾斜方向に応じて表示画像の表示形式を切り替えるように制御する(ステップS260)。そして、本フローチャートは終了する。 When the hold function is not turned on in step S210 (step S210: No), the tilt amount determination unit 122 determines the determination result (the casing's tilt amount, the tilt direction of the casing, and the tilt amount of the casing). A determination result indicating that the tilt amount is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount) and a notification (information) indicating that the hold function is set to OFF are output to the switching control unit 170. Next, the switching control unit 170 determines that the display format needs to be switched, and outputs the tilt amount of the housing and the tilt direction of the housing to the switching processing unit 180. The switching processing unit 180 that acquires the tilt amount of the housing and the tilt direction of the housing controls the display image display format to be switched according to the tilt amount of the housing and the tilt direction of the housing ( Step S260). Then, this flowchart ends.
 ステップS232において、両撮像画像における筐体の傾斜前後の撮像画像の何れから被写体の特徴部分を抽出できなかった場合には(ステップS232:No)、特徴領域抽出部130は、筐体の傾斜量、筐体の傾斜方向、及び、筐体の傾斜量に係る判定結果(筐体の傾斜量は所定量以上である旨の判定結果)とともに、特徴部分を抽出できなかった旨の通知を切替制御部170に出力する。次いで、切替制御部170は、表示形式の切り替えが必要であると判定し、筐体の傾斜量、及び、筐体の傾斜方向を切替処理部180に出力する。以下、ステップS210(No)の場合と同様の処理を行って、本フローチャートは終了する。 In step S232, when the feature portion of the subject cannot be extracted from any of the captured images before and after the tilt of the casing in both captured images (step S232: No), the feature area extraction unit 130 determines the tilt amount of the casing. In addition, the control unit switches the notification that the feature portion could not be extracted together with the determination result regarding the tilt direction of the casing and the determination result regarding the tilt amount of the casing (the determination result that the tilt amount of the casing is equal to or greater than a predetermined amount). Output to the unit 170. Next, the switching control unit 170 determines that the display format needs to be switched, and outputs the tilt amount of the housing and the tilt direction of the housing to the switching processing unit 180. Thereafter, the same processing as that in the case of step S210 (No) is performed, and this flowchart ends.
 ステップS252において、前方側変化率が後方側変化率以上である場合(ステップS252:No)、切替制御部170は、表示画像の表示形式の切り替えが必要であると判定し、筐体の傾斜量、及び、筐体の傾斜方向を切替処理部180に出力する。以下、ステップS210(No)の場合と同様の処理を行って、本フローチャートは終了する。 In step S252, when the front side change rate is equal to or higher than the rear side change rate (step S252: No), the switching control unit 170 determines that the display format of the display image needs to be switched, and the amount of inclination of the housing And the tilt direction of the housing is output to the switching processing unit 180. Thereafter, the same processing as that in the case of step S210 (No) is performed, and this flowchart ends.
(S310~ステップS370)
 ステップS200において筐体が所定量以上傾斜していないと判定された場合(ステップS200:No)、設定認識部112(又は傾斜量判定部122)は、追随機能がオンである否かを判断する(ステップS310)。
(S310 to step S370)
When it is determined in step S200 that the housing is not inclined more than the predetermined amount (step S200: No), the setting recognition unit 112 (or the inclination amount determination unit 122) determines whether or not the following function is on. (Step S310).
 ステップS310において追随機能がオンである場合(ステップS310:Yes)、傾斜量判定部122は、筐体の傾斜量、筐体の傾斜方向、及び、筐体の傾斜量に係る判定結果(筐体の傾斜量は所定量未満である旨の判定結果)を特徴領域抽出部130に出力する。次いで、特徴領域抽出部130は、両撮像画像における傾斜前後の撮像画像の夫々から被写体の特徴部分の抽出を試みて(ステップS322)、夫々の撮像画像から、被写体の特徴部分を抽出できたか否かを判断する(ステップS332)。 When the follow function is on in step S310 (step S310: Yes), the tilt amount determination unit 122 determines the determination result regarding the tilt amount of the casing, the tilt direction of the casing, and the tilt amount of the casing (the casing). Is output to the feature region extraction unit 130 as a result of determination that the inclination amount is less than a predetermined amount. Next, the feature region extraction unit 130 tries to extract the feature portion of the subject from each of the captured images before and after the inclination in both captured images (step S322), and whether or not the feature portion of the subject has been extracted from each captured image. Is determined (step S332).
 ステップS332において、両撮像画像における傾斜前後の撮像画像の夫々から被写体の特徴部分を抽出できた場合には(ステップS332:Yes)、特徴領域抽出部130は、筐体の傾斜量、筐体の傾斜方向、及び、筐体の傾斜量に係る判定結果(筐体の傾斜量は所定量未満である旨の判定結果)とともに、被写体の特徴部分を示す情報を変化量算出部140に出力する。次いで、変化量算出部140は、両撮像画像における被写体の特徴部分の時間的な変化率を算出し(ステップS342)、算出した変化率を、筐体の傾斜量、筐体の傾斜方向、及び、筐体の傾斜量に係る判定結果(筐体の傾斜量は所定量未満である旨の判定結果)とともに、切替制御部170に出力する。次いで、切替制御部170は、前方側変化率が後方側変化率未満であるか否かを判定する(ステップS352)。 In step S332, when the feature portion of the subject can be extracted from each of the captured images before and after the inclination in both captured images (step S332: Yes), the feature region extraction unit 130 determines the amount of inclination of the casing, Information indicating the characteristic part of the subject is output to the change amount calculation unit 140 together with the determination result related to the tilt direction and the tilt amount of the casing (the determination result that the tilt amount of the casing is less than the predetermined amount). Next, the change amount calculation unit 140 calculates a temporal change rate of the characteristic part of the subject in both captured images (step S342), and uses the calculated change rate as a tilt amount of the housing, a tilt direction of the housing, and And a determination result relating to the amount of inclination of the housing (a result of determination that the amount of inclination of the housing is less than a predetermined amount) is output to the switching control unit 170. Next, the switching control unit 170 determines whether or not the front side change rate is less than the rear side change rate (step S352).
 ステップS352において、前方側変化率が後方側変化率以上である場合(ステップS352:No)、切替制御部170は、表示画像の表示形式の切り替えが必要であると判定し、筐体の傾斜量、及び、筐体の傾斜方向を切替処理部180に出力する。筐体の傾斜量、及び、筐体の傾斜方向を取得した切替処理部180は、筐体の傾斜量、及び、筐体の傾斜方向に応じて表示画像の表示形式を切り替えるように制御する(ステップS360)。そして、本フローチャートは終了する。 In step S352, when the front side change rate is equal to or higher than the rear side change rate (step S352: No), the switching control unit 170 determines that the display format of the display image needs to be switched, and the amount of inclination of the housing And the tilt direction of the housing is output to the switching processing unit 180. The switching processing unit 180 that acquires the tilt amount of the housing and the tilt direction of the housing controls the display image display format to be switched according to the tilt amount of the housing and the tilt direction of the housing ( Step S360). Then, this flowchart ends.
 ステップS310において追随機能がオンでない場合(ステップS310:No)、傾斜量判定部122は、筐体の傾斜量、筐体の傾斜方向、及び、筐体の傾斜量に係る判定結果(筐体の傾斜量は所定量未満である旨の判定結果)とともに、追随機能がオフに設定されている旨の通知(情報)を切替制御部170に出力する。次いで、切替制御部170は、表示形式の切り替えが不要であると判定し、表示形式を維持する旨の通知(情報)を切替処理部180に出力する。表示形式を維持する旨の通知を取得した切替処理部180は、何もしない(ステップS370)。そして、本フローチャートは終了する。 When the follow function is not turned on in step S310 (step S310: No), the tilt amount determination unit 122 determines the determination result regarding the tilt amount of the housing, the tilt direction of the housing, and the tilt amount of the housing (for the housing). A determination result indicating that the inclination amount is less than the predetermined amount) and a notification (information) indicating that the following function is set to OFF are output to the switching control unit 170. Next, the switching control unit 170 determines that switching of the display format is unnecessary, and outputs a notification (information) to the effect that the display format is maintained to the switching processing unit 180. The switching processing unit 180 that has acquired the notification to maintain the display format does nothing (step S370). Then, this flowchart ends.
 ステップS332において、両撮像画像における筐体の傾斜前後の撮像画像の何れから被写体の特徴部分を抽出できなかった場合には(ステップS332:No)、特徴領域抽出部130は、筐体の傾斜量、筐体の傾斜方向、及び、筐体の傾斜量に係る判定結果(筐体の傾斜量は所定量以上である旨の判定結果)とともに、特徴部分を抽出できなかった旨の通知(情報)を切替制御部170に出力する。次いで、切替制御部170は、表示形式の切り替えが不要であると判定し、表示形式を維持する旨の通知(情報)を切替処理部180に出力する。以下、ステップS3310(No)の場合と同様の処理を行って、本フローチャートは終了する。 In step S332, when the feature portion of the subject cannot be extracted from any of the captured images before and after the tilt of the casing in both captured images (step S332: No), the feature region extraction unit 130 determines the tilt amount of the casing. , The tilt direction of the casing, and the determination result related to the tilt amount of the casing (determination result indicating that the tilt amount of the casing is equal to or greater than the predetermined amount) and notification that the feature portion could not be extracted (information) Is output to the switching control unit 170. Next, the switching control unit 170 determines that switching of the display format is unnecessary, and outputs a notification (information) to the effect that the display format is maintained to the switching processing unit 180. Thereafter, processing similar to that in the case of step S3310 (No) is performed, and this flowchart ends.
 ステップS352において、前方側変化率が後方側変化率未満である場合(ステップS352:Yes)、切替制御部170は、表示画像の表示形式の切り替えが不要であると判定し、表示形式を維持する旨の通知(情報)を切替処理部180に出力する。以下、ステップS310(No)の場合と同様の処理を行って、本フローチャートは終了する。 In step S352, when the forward change rate is less than the backward change rate (step S352: Yes), the switching control unit 170 determines that switching of the display format of the display image is not necessary, and maintains the display format. A notification (information) to that effect is output to the switching processing unit 180. Thereafter, the same processing as in the case of step S310 (No) is performed, and this flowchart is ended.
 図21及び図22は、表示形式の制御処理を説明する一例である。例えば、図21は、フロントカメラ62による撮像画像を利用して表示画像の表示形式を制御する態様における追随機能の一例である。図22は、フロントカメラ62による撮像画像に加え、バックカメラ64による撮像画像を利用して表示画像の表示形式を制御する態様追随機能の一例である。図21及び図22において、表示形式の切替機能、ホールド機能、追随機能の何れもオンに設定されているものとする。
 なお、ホールド機能については、第1の実施形態による電子機器3と同様である。
21 and 22 are examples illustrating the display format control processing. For example, FIG. 21 is an example of the following function in the aspect of controlling the display format of the display image using the image captured by the front camera 62. FIG. 22 is an example of a mode following function that controls the display format of the display image using the image captured by the back camera 64 in addition to the image captured by the front camera 62. 21 and 22, it is assumed that all of the display format switching function, the hold function, and the following function are set to ON.
The hold function is the same as that of the electronic device 3 according to the first embodiment.
 図21(a)は、図12(a)と同様、図9(a)の状態から、ユーザUが、自身のみを所定量以上傾斜させた様子を表している。図21(b)は、図21(a)の場合における、撮像画像SG’’(スルー画)を表している。図21(c)は、図21(a)の場合における、タッチスクリーン44に表示されている表示画像HG’(横長画像)である。 FIG. 21A shows a state in which only the user U is inclined by a predetermined amount or more from the state of FIG. 9A, as in FIG. FIG. 21B shows a captured image SG 3 ″ (through image) in the case of FIG. FIG. 21C is a display image HG 3 ′ (horizontal image) displayed on the touch screen 44 in the case of FIG.
 即ち、図19のフローチャートにおいて、切替制御部170は、筐体が所定量以上傾斜していない場合において、被写体の特徴部分の時間的な変化量が第2の閾値以上であると判定し(ステップS350:Yes)、切替処理部180は、筐体の傾斜量、及び、筐体の傾斜方向に応じて表示画像の表示形式を切り替えるように制御する(ステップS360)。 That is, in the flowchart of FIG. 19, the switching control unit 170 determines that the temporal change amount of the feature portion of the subject is equal to or greater than the second threshold when the casing is not tilted by a predetermined amount or more (step (S350: Yes), the switching processing unit 180 performs control so as to switch the display format of the display image according to the tilt amount of the housing and the tilt direction of the housing (step S360).
 図22(a)は、図17(a)と同様、図14(a)の状態から、ユーザUが、自身のみを所定量以上傾斜させた様子を表している。図22(b)は、図22(a)の場合において、フロントカメラ62によって撮像されている撮像画像SG4-1’’(スルー画)、及び、バックカメラ64によって撮像されている撮像画像SG4-2(スルー画)を表している。図22(b)において、前方側変化率は後方側変化率よりも大きい。図22(c)は、図22(a)の場合における、タッチスクリーン44に表示されている表示画像HG’(横長画像)である。 FIG. 22A shows a state in which only the user U tilts himself or herself by a predetermined amount or more from the state of FIG. 22B shows a captured image SG 4-1 ″ (through image) captured by the front camera 62 and a captured image SG captured by the back camera 64 in the case of FIG. 22A. 4-2 (through image) is displayed. In FIG. 22B, the front side change rate is larger than the rear side change rate. FIG. 22C is a display image HG 4 ′ (horizontal image) displayed on the touch screen 44 in the case of FIG.
 即ち、図20のフローチャートにおいて、切替制御部170は、筐体が所定量以上傾斜していない場合において、前方側変化率が後方側変化率以上であると判定し(ステップS352:No)、切替処理部180は、筐体の傾斜量、及び、筐体の傾斜方向に応じて表示画像の表示形式を切り替えるように制御する(ステップS360)。 That is, in the flowchart of FIG. 20, the switching control unit 170 determines that the front side change rate is equal to or higher than the rear side change rate when the housing is not tilted by a predetermined amount or more (step S352: No), and the switching is performed. The processing unit 180 performs control so as to switch the display format of the display image in accordance with the tilt amount of the housing and the tilt direction of the housing (step S360).
 以上、電子機器4によれば、意図しない画面形式(画面表示型)の切り替えが生じないため、ユーザの利便性を向上させることができる。例えば、ユーザが、図5(b)に示すように筐体とともに自分の顔を所定量以上傾斜させた場合には、図4に例示したような表示形式の切り替えがホールド機能によって生じないため、ユーザの利便性を向上させることができる。また例えば、筐体を傾斜させずに、自分の顔を所定量以上傾斜させた場合には、図4に例示したよう表示画面の表示形式の切り替えが追随機能によってなされるため、ユーザの利便性を向上させることができる。 As described above, according to the electronic device 4, since an unintended screen format (screen display type) is not switched, user convenience can be improved. For example, when the user tilts his / her face together with the housing by a predetermined amount or more as shown in FIG. 5B, the display function switching as illustrated in FIG. 4 is not caused by the hold function. User convenience can be improved. Further, for example, when the user's face is tilted by a predetermined amount or more without tilting the housing, the display screen display format is switched by the following function as illustrated in FIG. Can be improved.
 以上、本発明の第1の実施形態による電子機器3、本発明の第2の実施形態による電子機器4によれば、ユーザの使用状況に応じて、見易い表示形式の表示画面が提供され、ユーザの利便性が向上する。 As described above, according to the electronic device 3 according to the first embodiment of the present invention and the electronic device 4 according to the second embodiment of the present invention, an easy-to-view display screen is provided according to the usage state of the user, and the user Improved convenience.
 なお、電子機器3の処理の一部を外部の装置(例えば、サーバ)が実行し、電子機器3の表示形式を制御するようにしてもよい。同様に、電子機器4の処理の一部を外部の装置(例えば、サーバ)が実行し、電子機器4の表示形式を制御するようにしてもよい。 Note that a part of the processing of the electronic device 3 may be executed by an external device (for example, a server) to control the display format of the electronic device 3. Similarly, a part of the processing of the electronic device 4 may be executed by an external device (for example, a server) to control the display format of the electronic device 4.
 図23は、情報システム1の概略構成図である。図24A及び図24Bは、電子機器5が備える表示制御部104内のブロック図、及び、サーバ9が備える表示制御情報生成部200内のブロック図等の一例である。情報システム1は、図23に示すように、電子機器5とサーバ9とを含んで構成される。電子機器5とサーバ9とは、有線又は無線のネットワークにより接続されている。 FIG. 23 is a schematic configuration diagram of the information system 1. 24A and 24B are examples of a block diagram in the display control unit 104 included in the electronic device 5 and a block diagram in the display control information generation unit 200 included in the server 9. The information system 1 includes an electronic device 5 and a server 9 as shown in FIG. The electronic device 5 and the server 9 are connected by a wired or wireless network.
 電子機器5は、第1の実施形態による電子機器3と同様、タッチスクリーン44と、撮像部(第1撮像部及び第2撮像部)と、通信部70とを有する。より詳細には、電子機器5の構成は、表示制御部100に代えて表示制御部104を具備する点を除き、第1の実施形態による電子機器3の構成と同様である。 The electronic device 5 includes a touch screen 44, an imaging unit (a first imaging unit and a second imaging unit), and a communication unit 70, like the electronic device 3 according to the first embodiment. More specifically, the configuration of the electronic device 5 is the same as the configuration of the electronic device 3 according to the first embodiment except that the display control unit 104 is provided instead of the display control unit 100.
 表示制御部104は、図24Aに示すように、設定部194(電子機器3の設定部190又は電子機器4の設定部192と同様)を備える。 The display control unit 104 includes a setting unit 194 (similar to the setting unit 190 of the electronic device 3 or the setting unit 192 of the electronic device 4) as illustrated in FIG. 24A.
 通信部70は、撮像部による撮像画像、及び、筐体の傾斜量をサーバ9に送信し、タッチスクリーン44における表示画像の表示形式を制御する表示制御情報をサーバ9から受信する。 The communication unit 70 transmits the image captured by the imaging unit and the amount of inclination of the housing to the server 9 and receives display control information for controlling the display format of the display image on the touch screen 44 from the server 9.
 サーバ9は、図24Aに示すように、通信部270と表示制御情報生成部200とを有する。表示制御情報生成部200は、第1の実施形態による電子機器3の表示制御部100の設定認識部110、傾斜量判定部120、特徴領域抽出部130、変化量算出部140、切替判定部150、切替制限部160及び切替処理部180(又は、第2の実施形態による電子機器4の表示制御部102の設定認識部112、傾斜量判定部122、特徴領域抽出部130、変化量算出部140切替制御部170及び切替処理部180)と同様の機能を有する。 The server 9 includes a communication unit 270 and a display control information generation unit 200 as shown in FIG. 24A. The display control information generation unit 200 includes a setting recognition unit 110, a tilt amount determination unit 120, a feature region extraction unit 130, a change amount calculation unit 140, and a switching determination unit 150 of the display control unit 100 of the electronic device 3 according to the first embodiment. , The switching restriction unit 160 and the switching processing unit 180 (or the setting recognition unit 112, the tilt amount determination unit 122, the feature region extraction unit 130, and the change amount calculation unit 140 of the display control unit 102 of the electronic device 4 according to the second embodiment. It has the same function as the switching control unit 170 and the switching processing unit 180).
 通信部270は、電子機器5から撮像画像及び筐体の傾斜量を受信する。また、通信部270は、電子機器5に表示制御情報を送信する。 The communication unit 270 receives the captured image and the amount of inclination of the housing from the electronic device 5. In addition, the communication unit 270 transmits display control information to the electronic device 5.
 表示制御情報生成部200は、電子機器5から受信した撮像画像に含まれる被写体の特徴部分の時間的な変化量に基づいて、電子機器5に送信する表示制御情報を生成する。表示制御情報とは、表示画像の表示形式を示す情報(電子機器3(電子機器4)の切替処理部180がタッチスクリーンコントローラ42に出力する情報に相当)である。 The display control information generation unit 200 generates display control information to be transmitted to the electronic device 5 based on the temporal change amount of the feature portion of the subject included in the captured image received from the electronic device 5. The display control information is information indicating the display format of the display image (corresponding to information output from the switching processing unit 180 of the electronic device 3 (electronic device 4) to the touch screen controller 42).
 なお、電子機器5の設定情報(例えば、ホールド機能のオン/オフ情報)は、サーバ9が記憶してもよいし、電子機器5が記憶部30に記憶してもよい。サーバ9の表示制御情報生成部200は、必要に応じて、電子機器5から設定情報を受信し、表示制御情報を生成する際に参照する。 Note that the setting information (for example, hold function on / off information) of the electronic device 5 may be stored in the server 9 or may be stored in the storage unit 30. The display control information generation unit 200 of the server 9 receives setting information from the electronic device 5 as necessary, and refers to it when generating display control information.
 なお、電子機器5の表示制御部104は、図24Bに示すように、設定部194に加え、設定認識部110(112)、傾斜量判定部120(122)及び特徴領域抽出部130を備えていてもよい。なお、上記場合、サーバ9の表示制御情報生成部200は、図24Bに示すように、設定認識部110(112)、傾斜量判定部120(122)及び特徴領域抽出部130を有しなくてもよい。 Note that the display control unit 104 of the electronic device 5 includes a setting recognition unit 110 (112), an inclination amount determination unit 120 (122), and a feature region extraction unit 130 in addition to the setting unit 194, as shown in FIG. 24B. May be. In the above case, the display control information generation unit 200 of the server 9 does not include the setting recognition unit 110 (112), the inclination amount determination unit 120 (122), and the feature region extraction unit 130 as illustrated in FIG. 24B. Also good.
 電子機器5が特徴領域抽出部130等を備える態様の場合、電子機器5は、撮像画像に代えて、傾斜量判定部120(122)の処理結果(例えば、ホールド機能がオフに設定されている旨の通知)、又は、特徴領域抽出部130の処理結果(被写体の特徴部分を示す情報、又は、特徴部分を抽出できなかった旨の通知)をサーバ9に送信する。また、サーバ9の表示制御情報生成部200は、撮像画像に代えて、電子機器5から取得する処理結果を用いて表示制御情報を生成する。 In the case where the electronic device 5 includes the feature region extraction unit 130 and the like, the electronic device 5 has the processing result (for example, the hold function is set to off) instead of the captured image. Notification) or processing result of the feature area extraction unit 130 (information indicating the feature portion of the subject or notification that the feature portion could not be extracted) is transmitted to the server 9. Further, the display control information generation unit 200 of the server 9 generates display control information using a processing result acquired from the electronic device 5 instead of the captured image.
 なお、電子機器3(電子機器4、5も同様)において、バックカメラ64による撮像画像を利用して表示画像の表示形式を制御しない場合には、電子機器3は、バックカメラ64を有しなくてもよい。 Note that in the electronic device 3 (the same applies to the electronic devices 4 and 5), when the display format of the display image is not controlled using the image captured by the back camera 64, the electronic device 3 does not have the back camera 64. May be.
 電子機器3(サーバ9も同様)において、予め記憶した顔のみに対し、ホールド処理を行うようにしてもよい。即ち、表示形式の切替機能、及び、ホールド機能がオンに設定され、筐体が所定量以上傾斜した場合に、フロントカメラ62によって撮像された撮像画像から特徴領域抽出部130が抽出した被写体の特徴部分が、予め記憶した顔の特徴部分と一致すると判断されたときは、ホールド処理を実行するようにし(即ち、表示形式の切替を行わないようにし)、当該特徴部分が、予め記憶した顔の特徴部分と一致しないと判断されたときは、ホールド処理を実行しないようにしてもよい(即ち、表示形式の切替を行うようにしてもよい)、
 同様に、電子機器4(サーバ9も同様)において、予め記憶した顔のみに対し、追随処理を行うようにしてもよい。
In the electronic device 3 (same for the server 9), the hold process may be performed only on the face stored in advance. That is, the feature of the subject extracted by the feature region extraction unit 130 from the captured image captured by the front camera 62 when the display format switching function and the hold function are set to ON and the casing is tilted by a predetermined amount or more. When it is determined that the portion matches the pre-stored facial feature portion, the hold process is executed (that is, the display format is not switched), and the feature portion is stored in the pre-stored facial feature portion. When it is determined that the feature portion does not match, the hold process may not be executed (that is, the display format may be switched),
Similarly, in the electronic device 4 (same for the server 9), the following process may be performed only on the face stored in advance.
 なお、本発明の実施形態による電子機器3、電子機器4の処理を実行するためのプログラムをコンピュータ読み取り可能な記録媒体に記録して、当該記録媒体に記録されたプログラムをコンピュータシステムに読み込ませ、実行することにより、本発明の実施形態による電子機器3、電子機器4に係る上述した種々の処理を行ってもよい。なお、ここでいう「コンピュータシステム」とは、OSや周辺機器等のハードウェアを含むものであってもよい。また、「コンピュータシステム」は、WWWシステムを利用している場合であれば、ホームページ提供環境(あるいは表示環境)も含むものとする。また、「コンピュータ読み取り可能な記録媒体」とは、フロッピー(登録商標)ディスク、光磁気ディスク、SDカード、フラッシュメモリ等の書き込み可能な不揮発性メモリ、CD-ROM等の可搬媒体、コンピュータシステムに内蔵されるハードディスク等の記憶装置のことをいう。 Note that a program for executing processing of the electronic device 3 and the electronic device 4 according to the embodiment of the present invention is recorded on a computer-readable recording medium, and the program recorded on the recording medium is read into a computer system, By executing, the above-described various processes related to the electronic device 3 and the electronic device 4 according to the embodiment of the present invention may be performed. Here, the “computer system” may include an OS and hardware such as peripheral devices. Further, the “computer system” includes a homepage providing environment (or display environment) if a WWW system is used. The “computer-readable recording medium” refers to a floppy (registered trademark) disk, a magneto-optical disk, an SD card, a writable nonvolatile memory such as a flash memory, a portable medium such as a CD-ROM, and a computer system. A built-in storage device such as a hard disk.
 さらに「コンピュータ読み取り可能な記録媒体」とは、インターネット等のネットワークや電話回線等の通信回線を介してプログラムが送信された場合のサーバやクライアントとなるコンピュータシステム内部の揮発性メモリ(例えばDRAM(Dynamic Random Access Memory))のように、一定時間プログラムを保持しているものも含むものとする。また、上記プログラムは、このプログラムを記憶装置等に格納したコンピュータシステムから、伝送媒体を介して、あるいは、伝送媒体中の伝送波により他のコンピュータシステムに伝送されてもよい。ここで、プログラムを伝送する「伝送媒体」は、インターネット等のネットワーク(通信網)や電話回線等の通信回線(通信線)のように情報を伝送する機能を有する媒体のことをいう。また、上記プログラムは、前述した機能の一部を実現するためのものであっても良い。さらに、前述した機能をコンピュータシステムにすでに記録されているプログラムとの組み合わせで実現できるもの、いわゆる差分ファイル(差分プログラム)であっても良い。 Further, the “computer-readable recording medium” means a volatile memory (for example, DRAM (Dynamic DRAM) in a computer system that becomes a server or a client when a program is transmitted through a network such as the Internet or a communication line such as a telephone line. Random Access Memory)), etc., which hold programs for a certain period of time. The program may be transmitted from a computer system storing the program in a storage device or the like to another computer system via a transmission medium or by a transmission wave in the transmission medium. Here, the “transmission medium” for transmitting the program refers to a medium having a function of transmitting information, such as a network (communication network) such as the Internet or a communication line (communication line) such as a telephone line. The program may be for realizing a part of the functions described above. Furthermore, what can implement | achieve the function mentioned above in combination with the program already recorded on the computer system, and what is called a difference file (difference program) may be sufficient.
 以上、この発明の実施形態について図面を参照して詳述してきたが、具体的な構成はこの実施形態に限られるものではなく、この発明の要旨を逸脱しない範囲の設計等も含まれる。 As described above, the embodiment of the present invention has been described in detail with reference to the drawings. However, the specific configuration is not limited to this embodiment, and includes a design and the like within the scope not departing from the gist of the present invention.
1…情報システム 3、4、5…電子機器 9…サーバ 10…プロセッサ 20…インターフェイス部 30…記憶部 40…入出力部 42…タッチスクリーンコントローラ 44…タッチスクリーン 46…カーソルパッドコントローラ 48…カーソルパッド 50…モーションセンサ 52…GPS 54…方位計 56…仰角センサ 60…カメラ部 62…フロントカメラ 64…バックカメラ 70…通信部 80…オーディオ部 82…スピーカ 84…マイクロフォン 90…電源ボタン 92…決定/ホームボタン 100、102、104…表示制御部 110、112…設定認識部 120、122…傾斜量判定部 130…特徴領域抽出部 140…変化量算出部 150…切替判定部 160…切替制限部(ホールド部) 170…切替制御部 180…切替処理部 190、192…設定部 200…表示制御情報生成部 270…通信部 DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Information system 3, 4, 5 ... Electronic device 9 ... Server 10 ... Processor 20 ... Interface part 30 ... Memory | storage part 40 ... Input / output part 42 ... Touch screen controller 44 ... Touch screen 46 ... Cursor pad controller 48 ... Cursor pad 50 ... motion sensor 52 ... GPS 54 ... azimuth meter 56 ... elevation sensor 60 ... camera part 62 ... front camera 64 ... back camera 70 ... communication part 80 ... audio part 82 ... speaker 84 ... microphone 90 ... power button 92 ... decision / home button DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 100, 102, 104 ... Display control part 110, 112 ... Setting recognition part 120, 122 ... Inclination amount determination part 130 ... Feature area extraction part 140 ... Change amount calculation part 150 ... Switching determination part 160 ... Switching restriction part ( Rudo portion) 170 ... the switching control unit 180 ... switching unit 190, 192 ... setting unit 200 ... display control information generating section 270 ... communication unit

Claims (17)

  1.  表示データに基づく表示画像を表示する表示部と、
     前記表示部の前方側の被写体を撮像可能な撮像部と、
     前記前方側を撮像した被写体の特徴部分の時間的な変化量に基づいて、前記表示画像の表示形式を制御する表示制御部と
     を備えることを特徴とする電子機器。
    A display unit for displaying a display image based on the display data;
    An imaging unit capable of imaging a subject on the front side of the display unit;
    An electronic apparatus comprising: a display control unit that controls a display format of the display image based on a temporal change amount of a characteristic portion of a subject that images the front side.
  2.  請求項1に記載の電子機器において、
     前記表示制御部は、
     前記変化量に応じて、前記表示部における前記表示画像の表示形式を選択的に切り替える
     ことを特徴とする電子機器。
    The electronic device according to claim 1,
    The display control unit
    An electronic apparatus, wherein the display format of the display image on the display unit is selectively switched according to the amount of change.
  3.  請求項1又は請求項2に記載の電子機器において、
     前記撮像部は、筐体の動きを検出した時に、前記被写体の撮像を開始する
     ことを特徴とする電子機器。
    The electronic device according to claim 1 or 2,
    The electronic apparatus, wherein the imaging unit starts imaging the subject when detecting a movement of a housing.
  4.  請求項1~請求項3のいずれか一項に記載の電子機器において、
     前記表示制御部は、筐体の動きを検出した時から所定の時間までの前記特徴部分の時間的な変化量に基づいて、前記表示形式を制御する
     ことを特徴とする電子機器。
    The electronic device according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
    The electronic device according to claim 1, wherein the display control unit controls the display format based on a temporal change amount of the characteristic portion from a time when the movement of the housing is detected to a predetermined time.
  5.  請求項1~請求項4のいずれか一項に記載の電子機器において、
     筐体の傾斜を検出するセンサを更に備え、
     前記表示制御部は、
     前記筐体が所定量以上傾斜した場合に、
     前記変化量が第1の閾値以上であるときは、前記表示画像の表示形式を変えるように制御し、
     前記変化量が第1の閾値未満であるときは、前記表示画像の表示形式を変えないように制御する
     ことを特徴とする電子機器。
    The electronic device according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
    A sensor for detecting the inclination of the housing;
    The display control unit
    When the case is inclined more than a predetermined amount,
    When the amount of change is equal to or greater than a first threshold, control to change the display format of the display image,
    When the amount of change is less than a first threshold, control is performed so as not to change the display format of the display image.
  6.  請求項1~請求項4のいずれか一項に記載の電子機器において、
     筐体の傾斜を検出するセンサと、
     前記表示形式の制御機能であるホールド機能のオン/オフを設定する設定部と
     を更に備え、
     前記表示制御部は、
     前記筐体が所定量以上傾斜した場合であって前記ホールド機能がオンに設定されている場合は、
     前記変化量が第1の閾値以上であるときは、前記表示画像の表示形式を変えるように制御し、
     前記変化量が第1の閾値未満であるときは、前記表示画像の表示形式を変えないように制御し、
     前記筐体が所定量以上傾斜した場合であって前記ホールド機能がオフに設定されている場合は、
     前記表示画像の表示形式を変えるように制御する
     ことを特徴とする電子機器。
    The electronic device according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
    A sensor for detecting the inclination of the housing;
    A setting unit for setting on / off of a hold function which is a control function of the display format,
    The display control unit
    When the case is tilted more than a predetermined amount and the hold function is set to ON,
    When the amount of change is equal to or greater than a first threshold, control to change the display format of the display image,
    When the amount of change is less than the first threshold, control so as not to change the display format of the display image,
    When the case is tilted more than a predetermined amount and the hold function is set to off,
    An electronic apparatus characterized by controlling to change the display format of the display image.
  7.  請求項1~請求項4のいずれか一項に記載の電子機器において、
     筐体の傾斜を検出するセンサを更に備え、
     前記表示制御部は、
     前記筐体が所定量以上傾斜していない場合に、
     前記変化量が第2の閾値未満であるときは、前記表示画像の表示形式を変えないように制御し、
     前記変化量が第2の閾値以上であるときは、前記表示画像の表示形式を変えるように制御する
     ことを特徴とする電子機器。
    The electronic device according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
    A sensor for detecting the inclination of the housing;
    The display control unit
    When the casing is not inclined more than a predetermined amount,
    When the amount of change is less than the second threshold, control to not change the display format of the display image,
    When the change amount is equal to or larger than a second threshold value, the electronic apparatus is controlled to change a display format of the display image.
  8.  請求項1~請求項4のいずれか一項に記載の電子機器において、
     筐体の傾斜を検出するセンサと、
     前記表示形式の制御機能である追随機能のオン/オフを設定する設定部と
     を更に備え、
     前記表示制御部は、
     前記筐体が所定量以上傾斜していない場合であって前記追随機能がオンに設定されている場合は、
     前記変化量が第2の閾値未満であるときは、前記表示画像の表示形式を変えないように制御し、前記変化量が第2の閾値以上であるときは、前記表示画像の表示形式を変えるように制御し、
     前記筐体が所定量以上傾斜していない場合であって前記追随機能がオフに設定されている場合は、
     前記表示画像の表示形式を変えないように制御する
     ことを特徴とする電子機器。
    The electronic device according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
    A sensor for detecting the inclination of the housing;
    A setting unit for setting on / off of a follow function that is a control function of the display format;
    The display control unit
    When the case is not inclined more than a predetermined amount and the follow function is set to ON,
    When the change amount is less than the second threshold value, control is performed so as not to change the display format of the display image, and when the change amount is greater than or equal to the second threshold value, the display format of the display image is changed. Control and
    When the case is not inclined more than a predetermined amount and the follow function is set to off,
    An electronic apparatus, wherein control is performed so as not to change a display format of the display image.
  9.  請求項1~請求項8のいずれか一項に記載の電子機器において、
     前記表示部の後方側の被写体を撮像する第2撮像部を更に備え、
     前記表示制御部は、
     前記前方側を撮像した被写体の特徴部分の時間的な変化量と、前記後方側を撮像した被写体の特徴部分の時間的な変化量とに基づいて、前記表示画像の表示形式を制御する
     ことを特徴とする電子機器。
    The electronic device according to any one of claims 1 to 8,
    A second imaging unit that images a subject on the rear side of the display unit;
    The display control unit
    Controlling the display format of the display image based on the temporal change amount of the feature portion of the subject imaged on the front side and the temporal change amount of the feature portion of the subject imaged on the rear side. Features electronic equipment.
  10.  請求項9に記載の電子機器において、
     筐体の傾斜を検出するセンサを更に備え、
     前記表示制御部は、
     前記筐体が所定量以上傾斜した場合に、
     前記前方側を撮像した被写体の特徴部分の変化率である前方側変化率と、前記後方側を撮像した被写体の特徴部分の変化率である後方側変化率とを算出し、
     前記前方側変化率が前記後方側変化率以上であるときは、前記表示画像の表示形式を変えるように制御し、
     前記前方側変化率が前記後方側変化率未満であるときは、前記表示画像の表示形式を変えないように制御する
     ことを特徴とする電子機器。
    The electronic device according to claim 9,
    A sensor for detecting the inclination of the housing;
    The display control unit
    When the case is inclined more than a predetermined amount,
    Calculating a front side change rate that is a change rate of a feature portion of a subject that images the front side and a rear side change rate that is a change rate of a feature portion of a subject that images the back side;
    When the front side change rate is equal to or higher than the rear side change rate, control to change the display format of the display image,
    When the front side change rate is less than the rear side change rate, control is performed so as not to change the display format of the display image.
  11.  請求項9に記載の電子機器において、
     筐体の傾斜を検出するセンサと、
     前記表示形式の制御機能であるホールド機能のオン/オフを設定する設定部と
     を更に備え、
     前記表示制御部は、
     前記筐体が所定量以上傾斜した場合であって前記ホールド機能がオンに設定されている場合は、
     前記前方側を撮像した被写体の特徴部分の変化率である前方側変化率と、前記後方側を撮像した被写体の特徴部分の変化率である後方側変化率とを算出し、
     前記前方側変化率が前記後方側変化率以上であるときは、前記表示画像の表示形式を変えるように制御し、
     前記前方側変化率が前記後方側変化率未満であるときは、前記表示画像の表示形式を変えないように制御し、
     前記筐体が所定量以上傾斜した場合であって前記ホールド機能がオフに設定されている場合は、
     前記表示画像の表示形式を変えるように制御する
     ことを特徴とする電子機器。
    The electronic device according to claim 9,
    A sensor for detecting the inclination of the housing;
    A setting unit for setting on / off of a hold function which is a control function of the display format,
    The display control unit
    When the case is tilted more than a predetermined amount and the hold function is set to ON,
    Calculating a front side change rate that is a change rate of a feature portion of a subject that images the front side and a rear side change rate that is a change rate of a feature portion of a subject that images the back side;
    When the front side change rate is equal to or higher than the rear side change rate, control to change the display format of the display image,
    When the front side change rate is less than the rear side change rate, control so as not to change the display format of the display image,
    When the case is tilted more than a predetermined amount and the hold function is set to off,
    An electronic apparatus characterized by controlling to change the display format of the display image.
  12.  請求項9に記載の電子機器において、
     筐体の傾斜を検出するセンサを更に備え、
     前記表示制御部は、
     前記筐体が所定量以上傾斜していない場合に、
     前記前方側を撮像した被写体の特徴部分の変化率である前方側変化率と、前記後方側を撮像した被写体の特徴部分の変化率である後方側変化率とを算出し、
     前記前方側変化率が前記後方側変化率以上であるときは、前記表示画像の表示形式を変えるように制御し、
     前記前方側変化率が前記後方側変化率未満であるときは、前記表示画像の表示形式を変えないように制御する
     ことを特徴とする電子機器。
    The electronic device according to claim 9,
    A sensor for detecting the inclination of the housing;
    The display control unit
    When the casing is not inclined more than a predetermined amount,
    Calculating a front side change rate that is a change rate of a feature portion of a subject that images the front side and a rear side change rate that is a change rate of a feature portion of a subject that images the back side;
    When the front side change rate is equal to or higher than the rear side change rate, control to change the display format of the display image,
    When the front side change rate is less than the rear side change rate, control is performed so as not to change the display format of the display image.
  13.  請求項9に記載の電子機器において、
     筐体の傾斜を検出するセンサと、
     前記表示形式の制御機能である追随機能のオン/オフを設定する設定部と
     を更に備え、
     前記表示制御部は、
     前記筐体が所定量以上傾斜していない場合であって前記追随機能がオンに設定されている場合は、
     前記前方側を撮像した被写体の特徴部分の変化率である前方側変化率と、前記後方側を撮像した被写体の特徴部分の変化率である後方側変化率とを算出し、
     前記前方側変化率が前記後方側変化率以上であるときは、前記表示画像の表示形式を変えるように制御し、前記前方側変化率が前記後方側変化率未満であるときは、前記表示画像の表示形式を変えないように制御し、
     前記筐体が所定量以上傾斜していない場合であって前記追随機能がオフに設定されている場合は、
     前記表示画像の表示形式を変えないように制御する
     ことを特徴とする電子機器。
    The electronic device according to claim 9,
    A sensor for detecting the inclination of the housing;
    A setting unit for setting on / off of a follow function that is a control function of the display format;
    The display control unit
    When the case is not inclined more than a predetermined amount and the follow function is set to ON,
    Calculating a front side change rate that is a change rate of a feature portion of a subject that images the front side and a rear side change rate that is a change rate of a feature portion of a subject that images the back side;
    When the front side change rate is equal to or higher than the rear side change rate, control is performed so as to change the display format of the display image, and when the front side change rate is less than the rear side change rate, the display image is displayed. Control the display format of
    When the case is not inclined more than a predetermined amount and the follow function is set to off,
    An electronic apparatus, wherein control is performed so as not to change a display format of the display image.
  14.  請求項6又は請求項11に記載の電子機器において、
     前記設定部は、
     節電モードに設定されていない場合、前記ホールド機能をオンに設定する
     ことを特徴とする電子機器。
    The electronic device according to claim 6 or 11,
    The setting unit
    An electronic device, wherein the hold function is set to ON when the power saving mode is not set.
  15.  請求項8又は請求項13に記載の電子機器において、
     前記設定部は、
     節電モードに設定されていない場合、前記追随機能をオンに設定する
     ことを特徴とする電子機器。
    The electronic device according to claim 8 or 13,
    The setting unit
    An electronic device, wherein the follow function is turned on when the power saving mode is not set.
  16.  電子機器と、サーバとを含む情報システムであって、
     前記電子機器は、
     表示データに基づく表示画像を表示する表示部と、
     前記表示部の前方側の被写体を撮像可能な撮像部と、
     前記撮像部による撮像画像を前記サーバに送信し、前記表示画像の表示形式を制御する表示制御情報を前記サーバから受信する通信部と
    を備え、
     前記サーバは、
     前記電子機器から前記撮像画像を受信し、前記電子機器に前記表示制御情報を送信する通信部と、
     前記電子機器から受信した撮像画像に含まれる被写体の特徴部分の時間的な変化量に基づいて、前記電子機器に送信する前記表示制御情報を生成する表示制御情報生成部と
    を備える
     ことを特徴とする情報システム。
    An information system including an electronic device and a server,
    The electronic device is
    A display unit for displaying a display image based on the display data;
    An imaging unit capable of imaging a subject on the front side of the display unit;
    A communication unit that transmits a captured image by the imaging unit to the server and receives display control information for controlling a display format of the display image from the server;
    The server
    A communication unit that receives the captured image from the electronic device and transmits the display control information to the electronic device;
    A display control information generation unit configured to generate the display control information to be transmitted to the electronic device based on a temporal change amount of a characteristic portion of a subject included in a captured image received from the electronic device. Information system.
  17.  表示データに基づく表示画像を表示する表示部と、前記表示部の前方側の被写体を撮像可能な撮像部と、通信部とを備える電子機器と通信するサーバであって、
     前記電子機器から前記撮像画像を受信し、前記電子機器に前記表示制御情報を送信する通信部と、
     前記電子機器から受信した撮像画像に含まれる被写体の特徴部分の時間的な変化量に基づいて、前記電子機器に送信する前記表示制御情報を生成する表示制御情報生成部と
     を備えることを特徴とするサーバ。
     
    A server that communicates with an electronic device that includes a display unit that displays a display image based on display data, an imaging unit that can image a subject on the front side of the display unit, and a communication unit,
    A communication unit that receives the captured image from the electronic device and transmits the display control information to the electronic device;
    A display control information generation unit configured to generate the display control information to be transmitted to the electronic device based on a temporal change amount of a characteristic portion of a subject included in a captured image received from the electronic device. Server.
PCT/JP2012/079222 2011-11-10 2012-11-12 Electronic device, information system and server WO2013069796A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2013543060A JP6146307B2 (en) 2011-11-10 2012-11-12 Electronic device, information system, server, and program

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2011246571 2011-11-10
JP2011-246571 2011-11-10

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2013069796A1 true WO2013069796A1 (en) 2013-05-16

Family

ID=48290161

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2012/079222 WO2013069796A1 (en) 2011-11-10 2012-11-12 Electronic device, information system and server

Country Status (2)

Country Link
JP (3) JP6146307B2 (en)
WO (1) WO2013069796A1 (en)

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2016088493A1 (en) * 2014-12-03 2016-06-09 株式会社タカラトミー Motion-controlled video game device
JP2017207753A (en) * 2011-11-10 2017-11-24 株式会社ニコン Electronic device, information system, and server

Families Citing this family (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2019106007A (en) * 2017-12-12 2019-06-27 コニカミノルタ株式会社 Display device, display control method and program
JP2020052189A (en) * 2018-09-26 2020-04-02 いすゞ自動車株式会社 Display control device and display control method

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2002366075A (en) * 2001-06-13 2002-12-20 Kenwood Corp Power consumption reducing device for electronic equipment
WO2005119591A1 (en) * 2004-06-04 2005-12-15 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Display control device, display control method, program, and portable apparatus
JP2011135298A (en) * 2009-12-24 2011-07-07 Nikon Corp Electronic device and electronic device system
JP2011138449A (en) * 2010-01-04 2011-07-14 Nec Corp Display control device, display device, electronic apparatus and display control method

Family Cites Families (12)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
FI117217B (en) * 2003-10-01 2006-07-31 Nokia Corp Enforcement and User Interface Checking System, Corresponding Device, and Software Equipment for Implementing the Process
JP2008129775A (en) * 2006-11-20 2008-06-05 Ntt Docomo Inc Display control unit, display device and display control method
US8244068B2 (en) * 2007-03-28 2012-08-14 Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications Ab Device and method for adjusting orientation of a data representation displayed on a display
US20080266326A1 (en) * 2007-04-25 2008-10-30 Ati Technologies Ulc Automatic image reorientation
JP5433935B2 (en) * 2007-07-24 2014-03-05 日本電気株式会社 Screen display control method, screen display control method, electronic device, and program
JP2009294728A (en) * 2008-06-02 2009-12-17 Sony Ericsson Mobilecommunications Japan Inc Display processor, display processing method, display processing program, and portable terminal device
US8896632B2 (en) * 2008-09-12 2014-11-25 Qualcomm Incorporated Orienting displayed elements relative to a user
JP5312967B2 (en) * 2009-01-30 2013-10-09 国立大学法人 名古屋工業大学 Map display device, map display system, and map display method
JP2011186097A (en) * 2010-03-08 2011-09-22 Nikon Corp Projector
JP5184570B2 (en) * 2010-03-24 2013-04-17 株式会社エヌ・ティ・ティ・ドコモ Information terminal and display switching method
JP5440334B2 (en) * 2010-04-05 2014-03-12 船井電機株式会社 Mobile information display terminal
JP6146307B2 (en) * 2011-11-10 2017-06-14 株式会社ニコン Electronic device, information system, server, and program

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2002366075A (en) * 2001-06-13 2002-12-20 Kenwood Corp Power consumption reducing device for electronic equipment
WO2005119591A1 (en) * 2004-06-04 2005-12-15 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Display control device, display control method, program, and portable apparatus
JP2011135298A (en) * 2009-12-24 2011-07-07 Nikon Corp Electronic device and electronic device system
JP2011138449A (en) * 2010-01-04 2011-07-14 Nec Corp Display control device, display device, electronic apparatus and display control method

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2017207753A (en) * 2011-11-10 2017-11-24 株式会社ニコン Electronic device, information system, and server
WO2016088493A1 (en) * 2014-12-03 2016-06-09 株式会社タカラトミー Motion-controlled video game device
JP2016106715A (en) * 2014-12-03 2016-06-20 株式会社タカラトミー Hands-on video game apparatus

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP6146307B2 (en) 2017-06-14
JP2019117378A (en) 2019-07-18
JPWO2013069796A1 (en) 2015-04-02
JP6828758B2 (en) 2021-02-10
JP2017207753A (en) 2017-11-24
JP6477782B2 (en) 2019-03-06

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11102398B2 (en) Distributing processing for imaging processing
JP6828758B2 (en) Electronics, information systems, and programs
US20220321775A1 (en) Method and terminal for acquiring panoramic image
US9521247B2 (en) Above-lock camera access
WO2020103526A1 (en) Photographing method and device, storage medium and terminal device
JP5857257B2 (en) Display device and display direction switching method
US9106821B1 (en) Cues for capturing images
JP6109413B2 (en) Image display method, image display apparatus, terminal, program, and recording medium
TWI581176B (en) Image adjusting system and method
WO2017124899A1 (en) Information processing method, apparatus and electronic device
WO2011103742A1 (en) Frame control method and electronic device
TW201441916A (en) Method and system for whirling view on screen
US9215003B2 (en) Communication apparatus, communication method, and computer readable recording medium
US20140354784A1 (en) Shooting method for three dimensional modeling and electronic device supporting the same
US11706378B2 (en) Electronic device and method of controlling electronic device
KR20190135794A (en) Mobile terminal
JP2008277904A (en) Image processor, image direction discrimination method and image direction discrimination program, reproducing device, reproducing method and reproducing program, and digital still camera
JP2012243266A (en) Electronic apparatus and display method
CN113592874A (en) Image display method and device and computer equipment
CN110660031B (en) Image sharpening method and device and storage medium
JP6164958B2 (en) Information processing apparatus, direction specifying method, computer program, and storage medium
CN113139919A (en) Special effect display method and device, computer equipment and storage medium
CN113065457A (en) Face detection point processing method and device, computer equipment and storage medium

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 12847755

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2013543060

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 12847755

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1